JP2023039793A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To realize an intended ball putout performance.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 1 includes, as a completion condition of a time-shortening state, a time-shortening completion condition 1 regarding the number of times of a first special pattern game, a time-shortening completion condition 2 regarding the number of times of a second special pattern game, and a time-shortening completion condition 3 regarding the number of times of a normal pattern game as completion conditions of a time-shortening state. Especially, as the number of times of a first special pattern game (a first time-shortening frequency) pertaining to the time-shortening completion condition 1, a smaller number of times is prescribed as compared with the number of a second special pattern game (a second time-shortening frequency) pertaining to the time-shortening completion condition 2 and the number of times of a normal pattern game (a third time-shortening frequency) pertaining to the time-shortening completion condition 3. Accordingly, the time-shortening state can be completed at early timing even if progress of a game mainly comprising a normal pattern game is changed to progress of a game mainly comprising a first special pattern game immediately before the number of times of a normal pattern game reaches the third time-shortening frequency during occurrence of a time-shortening state in the Pachinko machine 1.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which a game is mainly progressed with a normal symbol game.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known in which a game is mainly progressed with a normal symbol game (see Patent Document 1). In this gaming machine, when the starting port is in a closed state, the game is mainly progressed with a game (ordinary design game) aimed at passing the game ball through the normal design operation gate.

JP 2019-170620 A

However, in the conventional game machine, there is a possibility that the intended ball output performance may be exceeded.
That is, in the conventional gaming machine, when the time-saving control is terminated when the number of executions of the normal symbol game reaches the specified number of times, during the time-saving control, just before the number of times of executing the normal symbol game reaches the specified number of times Then, by switching from the progress of the game mainly based on the normal symbol game to the progress of the game mainly based on the first special symbol game, the time reduction control is extended, and as a result, there is a possibility that the intended ball output performance may be exceeded.
An object of the present invention is to realize the intended ball putting performance.

To achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the first invention comprises first game information acquisition means for acquiring first game information when a game ball passes through a first area; second game information acquisition means for acquiring second game information when the game ball passes through the area; third game information acquisition means for acquiring third game information when the game ball passes through the third area; First game determination means for executing a first game determination based on the first game information or the second game information; Second game determination means for executing a second game determination based on the third game information; When the first game determination based on the first game information is executed, first game control means for executing the first game, and when the first game determination based on the second game information is executed, Second game control means for executing a second game, third game control means for executing a third game when the second game determination based on the third game information is executed, and the second game determination a predetermined game state control means for generating a predetermined game state in which the passage of the game ball through the second area is facilitated when a predetermined result is determined by the control means, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the game is advantageous to the player. an advantageous state control means for generating an advantageous state, wherein the first game is mainly played when the advantageous state is not generated, and the third game is mainly used when the advantageous state is generated. A game is progressed, and as conditions for ending the advantageous state, a first condition regarding the number of times of the first game, a second condition regarding the number of times of the second game, and a third condition regarding the number of times of the third game are met. characterized by being included.
In the gaming machine according to the first invention, the conditions for ending the advantageous state include a first condition regarding the number of times the first game is played, a second condition regarding the number of times the second game is played, and a third condition regarding the number of times the third game is played; It is included.
As a result, in the gaming machine according to the first invention, the advantageous state can be ended regardless of which game among the first game, the second game, and the third game is executed. . As a result, it becomes possible to achieve the intended ball-balling performance.
Here, the first region corresponds to a first starting port 51, which will be described later. As the first game information, special figure 1 game information, which will be described later, corresponds. A main control board 200 (step S7-3), which will be described later, corresponds to the first game information acquisition means. The second region corresponds to a second starting port 52, which will be described later. As the second game information, the later-described special figure 2 game information corresponds. A main control board 200 (step S8-3), which will be described later, corresponds to the second game information acquisition means. A starting gate 41, which will be described later, corresponds to the third area. As the third game information, normal game information, which will be described later, corresponds. A main control board 200 (step S6-1), which will be described later, corresponds to the third game information acquisition means. The first game determination corresponds to start determination (steps S11-7, S11-8, S11-11), which will be described later. A main control board 200 (steps S11-7, S11-8, S11-11), which will be described later, corresponds to the first game determination means. The second game determination corresponds to start determination (steps S20-3, S20-4, S20-5), which will be described later. A main control board 200 (steps S20-3, S20-4, S20-5), which will be described later, corresponds to the second game determination means. The first game corresponds to a first special symbol game, which will be described later. A main control board 200 (step S11-14), which will be described later, corresponds to the first game control means. A second special symbol game corresponds to the second game. A main control board 200 (step S11-14), which will be described later, corresponds to the second game control means. As the third game, a normal symbol game, which will be described later, corresponds. A main control board 200 (step S20-7), which will be described later, corresponds to the third game control means. As the predetermined result, the later-described "normal drawing hit" corresponds. As the predetermined game state, the normal game per game state to be described later corresponds. A main control board 200 (step S22-4), which will be described later, corresponds to the predetermined game state control means. The case where the predetermined condition is established corresponds to the case where a jackpot game state, which will be described later, is generated. The advantageous state corresponds to a time-saving state described later. A main control board 200 (step S43-2), which will be described later, corresponds to the advantageous state control means. As the first condition, a time-saving end condition 1, which will be described later, corresponds. As the second condition, a later-described time saving end condition 2 corresponds. As the third condition, a time saving end condition 3, which will be described later, corresponds.

A gaming machine according to a second invention is the gaming machine according to the first invention, wherein a specific result is determined by the first game determination based on the first game information executed while the advantageous state is not occurring. When the specific result is determined by the first game determination based on the first game information executed during occurrence of the advantageous state, it is more advantageous to the player than when the first condition is satisfied. The number of times of the first game is defined to be smaller than the number of times of the second game under the second condition and the number of times of the third game under the third condition. Characterized by
In the gaming machine according to the second invention, the number of first games under the first condition is compared with the number of second games under the second condition and the number of third games under the third condition. A small number of times is specified.
As a result, in the gaming machine according to the second invention, immediately before the number of times the third game is played reaches the specified number of times while the advantageous state is occurring, the game progresses mainly from the third game to the first game. Even if the progress of the game is switched to the progress of the game that has been played, the advantageous state can be ended at an early timing. As a result, it becomes possible to achieve the intended ball-balling performance.
Here, "big win"("big win symbol 1") to be described later corresponds to the specified result. As the number of times of the first game related to the first condition, the first number of time reductions described later corresponds. As the number of times of the second game according to the second condition, a second time-saving number of times, which will be described later, corresponds. As the number of times of the third game related to the third condition, a third time-saving number of times, which will be described later, corresponds.

According to the present invention, it is possible to achieve the intended ball-balling performance.

1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a diagram showing the front of the game board, and schematically showing a part particularly necessary for explanation. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the control system of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the winning probability of various lotteries. It is a diagram showing the winning type of normal symbol lottery. It is a figure which shows the winning classification of special design lottery. It is a figure which shows the transition of a game state. 4 is a flowchart showing CPU initialization processing; 4 is a flowchart showing main loop processing; 7 is a flow chart showing saving processing at power-off. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing dynamic port output processing; 4 is a flowchart showing performance display device output processing. 8 is a flowchart showing setting-related processing; 4 is a flowchart showing switch management processing; It is a flow chart which shows normal figure starting ball detection processing. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 starting ball detection process. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 starting ball detection process. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol random number acquisition process. It is a flow chart showing a special game management process. It is a flow chart showing a special figure variation waiting process. It is a flow chart showing processing during special figure fluctuation. 7 is a flow chart showing a number cutting management process; It is a flowchart which shows processing during a special figure stop. It is a flow chart showing a first big winning opening pre-opening process. It is a flow chart showing a first big winning opening opening control process. It is a flow chart showing a first big winning opening closing effective process. It is a flow chart showing a wait process for the end of the opening of the first big winning opening. It is a flow chart which shows a second big prize winning opening pre-opening process. It is a flow chart which shows a second big winning opening opening control process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd big winning a prize mouth closing effective process. It is a flow chart showing a wait process for the end of opening the second big winning opening. 10 is a flowchart showing a special electric service open/close switching process; It is a flow chart showing normal game management processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal figure fluctuation waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing during normal figure fluctuation. 7 is a flow chart showing a number cutting management process; It is a flow chart which shows processing during normal figure stop. It is a flow chart showing normal electric accessary product opening pre-processing. 10 is a flowchart showing normal electric open/close switching processing; It is a flow chart showing normal electric accessory opening control processing. It is a flow chart showing normal electric accessary product closing effective processing. It is a flowchart showing normal electric accessary product open end wait processing. 4 is a flowchart showing performance display device control processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen 31a. It is a diagram showing a time saving end condition in the conventional gaming machine.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In this embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1. FIG.

(Overall Configuration of Pachinko Machine 1)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine.
The pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame unit 2, an inner frame unit 3, a front frame unit 4, and a game board unit 10. - 特許庁
The outer frame unit 2, inner frame unit 3 and front frame unit 4 are fixed to each other via a hinge mechanism. Thereby, the inner frame unit 3 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2 . Also, the front frame unit 4 can be opened and closed with respect to each of the inner frame unit 3 and the outer frame unit 2 .

The outer frame unit 2 includes a rectangular frame (outer frame). The outer frame provided in the outer frame unit 2 is fixed to the island facilities of the game arcade.
The inner frame unit 3 includes a rectangular frame (inner frame). The inner frame unit 3 is arranged inside the outer frame unit 2 .
The front frame unit 4 is formed in a rectangular door shape. The door unit 4 includes a transparent plate 4a arranged substantially in the center, a decorative portion 4b arranged around the transparent plate 4a, a tray unit 5 arranged below the transparent plate 4a, and a tray. and a firing handle 6 disposed laterally of the unit 5 .
The transparent plate 4a is formed in a flat plate shape from a transparent material such as resin or glass. The decorative portion 4b is made of a transparent or translucent resin material and has a shape that protrudes forward. At each upper corner of the decorative portion 4b, there is provided a sound removing portion 4c in which a speaker 22 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. Each sound removal part 4c is provided with a plurality of sound removal holes through which the sound output by the speaker 22 is passed. A frame lamp 20 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the decorative portion 4b. The frame lamp 20 includes a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The receiving tray unit 5 has a receiving tray 5a for receiving game balls (rental balls and prize balls), and an effect button 5b and a rotary selector 5c provided on the front side of the receiving tray 5a.
The effect button 5b is formed in a substantially columnar shape and arranged so as to protrude upward from the tray unit 5. - 特許庁The effect button 5b can be pressed by the player (an operation of pressing downward). Inside the tray unit 5, a first operation detection switch 24 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a pressing operation of the effect button 5b is arranged. The first operation detection switch 24 outputs a first operation signal to the effect control board 300 (see FIG. 3) each time the effect button 5b is pressed.
The rotary selector 5c (so-called "jog dial") is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape and arranged so as to surround the production button 5b. The rotary selector 5c can be rotated by the player (rotated around the cylindrical axis). Inside the tray unit 5, a second operation detection switch 25 (see FIG. 3) is arranged for detecting a rotation operation of the rotary selector 5c. The second operation detection switch 25 outputs a second operation signal to the effect control board 300 each time the rotary selector 5c is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60[°]).

A lending operation unit 7 is arranged on the upper surface of the tray unit 5 . The rental operation unit 7 has a ball rental button 7a, a return button 7b, and a frequency display device 7c.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is communicably connected to a CR unit (not shown) capable of reading and updating information recorded on the prepaid card. Then, when a prepaid card (not shown) is inserted into the CR unit, the remaining credits of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit are displayed on the count display device 7c.
Further, when the ball lending button 7a is operated while the prepaid card is inserted in the CR unit, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the receiving tray 5a. At this time, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded in the prepaid card is updated according to the number of game balls paid out, and the updated remaining frequency of the valuable medium is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Further, when the return button 7b is operated while the prepaid card with the remaining credits of the valuable medium is inserted in the CR unit, the prepaid card is returned from the CR unit.
Here, as a prepaid cart, for example, a magnetic storage medium, a storage IC built-in medium, and the like correspond.
The shooting handle 6 can be rotated by the player. Inside the firing handle 6 is disposed a firing volume 410 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the angle at which the firing handle 6 is rotated. The shooting volume 410 outputs a detection signal corresponding to the detected angle to the payout control board 400 (see FIG. 3).

(Configuration of game board unit 10)
Next, the configuration of the game board unit 10 will be described.
FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the front of the game board and schematically showing a part particularly necessary for explanation. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen 31a.
The game board unit 10 is supported by the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the game board unit 10 is attached to the inner side of the inner frame of the inner frame unit 3 . Thereby, the game board unit 10 is arranged on the back side of the front frame unit 4 . A player can visually recognize a later-described game board 11 (game area 30) through the transparent plate 4a. In this embodiment, a game area 30, which will be described later, is formed between the back surface of the transparent plate 4a and the front surface of the game board 11. As shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board unit 10 includes a set board (not shown), a game board 11 attached to the set board, and various effect devices (main image display device 31, sub image display device 32, movable body unit, etc.).
The set plate is formed in a box shape with an open front side. An opening formed by a through hole is provided in a substantially central portion of the back plate of the set plate.

The game board 11 is attached to the front side of the set board. The game board 11 is made of resin and formed in a flat plate shape. An opening (not shown) consisting of a through hole is provided at substantially the center of the game board 11 . The player can visually recognize the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 through the opening provided in the game board 11 and the opening provided in the set board.
Around the opening in the front of the game board 11, a game area 30 is formed in which game balls shot out according to the rotation operation of the shooting handle 6 flow down. In the game area 30, a left path formed on the left side of the main image display device 31 and a right path formed on the right side of the main image display device 31 are configured as paths along which game balls flow down. there is
Also, in the game area 30 of the game board 11, a board surface lamp 21 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. The board lamp 21 includes a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The main image display device 31 is attached to the back side of the set plate. The main image display device 31 is configured by a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display. The main image display device 31 has a display screen 31a capable of displaying effect images.
As shown in FIG. 45, the display screen 31a has a special figure mini symbol display area A1, a special figure 1 fourth symbol display area A2, and a special figure 2 fourth symbol display area as display areas related to the identification information for effect. It is possible to configure an area A3, a general pattern mini symbol display area A4, a general pattern 4th symbol display area A5, and a main effect symbol display area A6.

The special figure mini-symbol display area A1 includes three special figure display areas (not shown). In each special figure display area, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the special figure mini effect pattern a1. Each special figure mini effect pattern a1 is a pattern for effect, and includes identification information (design) such as numbers, letters, symbols, and characters. In this embodiment, 9 types of special mini effect patterns a1 (special mini effect patterns a1 displaying each identification information of "1" to "9") are defined.
In the special figure 1 fourth design display area A2, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the special figure 1 fourth production design a2. The special figure 1 fourth production design a2 is a design for production, and includes identification information (design) such as numbers, letters, symbols, and characters. In this embodiment, two types of special figure 1 fourth production design a2 (special figure 1 fourth production design a2 displaying each identification information of "◯" and "x") are defined.
In the special figure 2 fourth design display area A3, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the special figure 2 fourth production design a3. The special figure 2 fourth production design a3 is a design for production, and includes identification information (design) such as numbers, letters, symbols, and characters. In this embodiment, two types of special figure 2 fourth production pattern a3 (special figure 2 fourth production pattern a3 displaying each identification information of "◯" and "x") are defined.

In the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area A2, a display for notifying the result of the first special symbol lottery, which will be described later, is performed. Then, a combination of three special-figure mini effect patterns a1 stop-displayed in the special-figure mini-symbol display area A1 and the special-figure 1 fourth effect design a2 stop-displayed in the special-figure 1 fourth design display area A2. , the result of the first special symbol lottery is notified.
That is, the variable display of the effect symbols a1 and a2 performed in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area A2 is the variation of the first special symbol performed in the special figure 1 display device described later. compatible with display. In addition, the stop display of the effect symbols a1 and a2 executed in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area A2 is the stop display of the first special symbol performed in the special figure 1 display device. Yes.
Specifically, during the variable display of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display device, as a display corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 (each special figure display area) , The variable display of the special figure mini effect pattern a1 is performed, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth effect symbol a2 is performed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area A2. Also, during the stop display of the first special symbol on the special figure 1 display device, as a display corresponding to the stop display of the first special symbol, in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 (each special figure display area) The stop display of the mini figure effect pattern a1 is executed, and the stop display of the special figure 1 fourth effect symbol a2 is executed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area A2.
At this time, the display of the first special symbol on the special figure 1 display device and the display of the effect symbols a1 and a2 in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area A2 are displayed in a variable display. The time to start, the content of the variable display, the time to end the variable display, the time to start the stop display, and the lottery results indicated by the stopped symbols are associated with each other.
Here, the variable display of the effect symbols a1 and a2 means that the type of the special symbol mini effect symbol a1 displayed in each special symbol display area of the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 is sequentially changed and the special symbol The kind of special figure 1 4th design a2 displayed in 1 4th design display area A2 means the display which is changed one by one. In addition, the stop display of the production patterns a1 and a2 means that one type of special-figure mini production pattern a1 is stopped in each special-figure display area of the special-figure mini-symbol display area A1, and the special-figure 1 fourth design In the display area A2, it refers to a display in which one type of special figure 1 fourth pattern a2 is stopped.

In the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area A3, a display for notifying the result of the second special symbol lottery, which will be described later, is performed. Then, a combination of the three special-figure mini effect patterns a1 stopped and displayed in the special-figure mini-symbol display area A1 and the special-figure 2 fourth effect design a3 stop-displayed in the special-figure 2 fourth design display area A3. By, the result of the second special symbol lottery is notified.
That is, the variable display of the effect symbols a1 and a3 performed in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area A3 is the variation of the second special symbol performed in the special figure 2 display device described later. Compatible with display. In addition, the stop display of the effect symbols a1 and a3 performed in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area A3 is the stop display of the second special symbol performed in the special figure 2 display device. Yes.
Specifically, during the variable display of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 display device, as a display corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 (each special figure display area) , The variable display of the special figure mini effect pattern a1 is performed, and the variable display of the special figure 2 fourth effect symbol a3 is performed in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area A3. Also, during the stop display of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 display device, as a display corresponding to the stop display of the second special symbol, in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 (each special figure display area), The stop display of the figure mini production pattern a1 is executed, and the stop display of the special figure 2 fourth production pattern a3 is executed in the special figure 2 fourth design display area A3.
At this time, the display of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 display device, and the display of the effect symbols a1 and a3 in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area A3, the fluctuation display is started The time to start, the content of the variable display, the time to end the variable display, the time to start the stop display, and the lottery results indicated by the stopped symbols are associated with each other.
Here, the variable display of the performance symbols a1 and a3 means that the type of the special mini performance symbols a1 displayed in each special symbol display area of the special mini symbol display area A1 is sequentially changed, and the special symbol The kind of special figure 2 4th design a3 displayed in 2 4th design display area A3 means the display which is changed one by one. In addition, the stop display of the production patterns a1 and a3 means that one type of special-figure mini production pattern a1 is stopped in each special-figure display area of the special-figure mini-symbol display area A1, and the special-figure 2 fourth design In the display area A3, it refers to a display in which one type of special figure 2 fourth pattern a3 is stopped.

The general pattern mini-symbol display area A4 includes three general pattern display areas (not shown). In each general pattern display area, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the general pattern mini effect pattern a4. Each general-purpose mini production pattern a4 is a pattern for production, and includes identification information (design) such as numbers, letters, symbols, and characters. In this embodiment, nine types of general-purpose mini effect symbols a4 (normal-size mini effect symbols a4 displaying each identification information of "1" to "9") are defined.
In the normal pattern 4th pattern display area A5, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the normal pattern 4th production pattern a5. The normal figure fourth production pattern a5 is a pattern for production, and includes identification information (design) such as numbers, letters, symbols, and characters. In this embodiment, two types of normal-figure 1 fourth production pattern a5 (normal-figure fourth production pattern a5 displaying each identification information of "O" and "X") are defined.

In the general pattern mini symbol display area A4 and the general pattern 4th symbol display area A5, a display for notifying the result of the normal symbol lottery, which will be described later, is executed. Then, by combining the three normal mini effect symbols a4 stop-displayed in the normal mini-symbol display area A4 and the 4th normal-sign effect symbol a5 stop-displayed in the 4th normal-figure pattern display area A5, The result of the normal symbol lottery is reported.
In other words, the variable display of the effect symbols a4 and a5 executed in the general-purpose mini symbol display area A4 and the general-purpose fourth symbol display area A5 corresponds to the variable display of the normal symbols executed in the general-purpose symbol display device to be described later. ing. In addition, the stop display of the effect symbols a4 and a5 executed in the normal-figure mini-symbol display area A4 and the normal-figure fourth symbol display area A5 corresponds to the stop-display of the normal-figure executed in the normal-figure display device. .
Specifically, during the variable display of the normal pattern in the general pattern display device, in the general pattern mini pattern display area A4 (each special pattern display area), the variable display of the general pattern mini effect pattern a4 is executed, and the normal pattern In the figure 4 symbol display area A5, the variable display of the normal figure 4th effect symbol a5 is executed. In addition, during the stop display of the normal pattern on the general pattern display device, the stop display of the general pattern mini effect pattern a4 is executed in the general pattern mini pattern display area A4 (each special pattern display area), In the 4-symbol display area A5, the stop display of the normal-symbol fourth effect symbol a5 is executed.
At this time, the display of the normal symbols on the general-purpose display device and the display of the effect symbols a4 and a5 in the general-purpose mini-symbol display area A4 and the general-purpose fourth symbol display area A5 are the time when the fluctuation display is started, the fluctuation The content of the display, the time when the variable display ends, the time when the stop display starts, and the lottery results indicated by the stopped symbols are associated with each other.
Here, the variable display of the production patterns a4 and a5 means that the type of the general-sized mini production pattern a4 displayed in each special-design display area of the general-sized mini-symbol display area A4 is sequentially changed, and This is a display in which the type of the fourth normal pattern a5 displayed in the fourth pattern display area A5 is sequentially changed. In addition, the stop display of the production patterns a4 and a5 means that one kind of the mini-zoom mini production pattern a4 is stopped in each special-picture display area of the mini-zoom symbol display area A4, and the fourth 4th general-zoom pattern is displayed. In the area A5, it refers to a display in which one kind of normal fourth symbol a5 is stopped.

The main effect symbol display area A6 includes three effect symbol display areas (not shown). In each effect symbol display area, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the main effect symbol a6. Each main effect pattern a6 is a pattern for effect, and includes identification information (symbols) such as numbers, letters, symbols, and characters. In this embodiment, nine types of main effect symbols a6 (main effect symbols a6 displaying each identification information of "1" to "9") are defined.
In the case of the occurrence of the normal state described later (during the non-occurrence of the time saving state described later), in the main effect symbol display area A6, in order to notify the result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is displayed. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is notified by a combination of the three main effect symbols a6 stopped and displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6.
That is, when the normal state is occurring, the variable display of the main effect symbol a6 executed in the main effect symbol display area A6 is replaced by the variable display of the special mini effect symbol a1 executed in the special mini symbol display area A1. Yes. Also, when the normal state is occurring, the stop display of the main effect symbol a6 executed in the main effect symbol display area A6 is replaced by the stop display of the special mini effect symbol a1 executed in the special mini symbol display area A1. Yes.
Specifically, when the normal state is occurring, during the fluctuation display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the special figure display device (special figure 1 display device or special figure 2 display device), As a display corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the main effect symbol a6 is executed in the main effect symbol display area A6 (each special symbol display area). In other words, when the normal state is occurring, during the variable display of the special mini effect symbol a1, the main effect symbol display area A6 (each special symbol display area), the variable display of the main effect symbol a6 is executed. Also, when the normal state is occurring, during the stop display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the special figure display device (special figure 1 display device or special figure 2 display device), the special As a display corresponding to the stop display of the symbols, the stop display of the main effect symbol a6 is executed in the main effect symbol display area A6 (each special symbol display area). In other words, when the normal state is occurring, during the stop display of the special mini effect symbol a1, the main effect symbol display area A6 (each special symbol display area), the stop display of the main effect symbol a6 is executed.

On the other hand, when a time-saving state, which will be described later, is occurring, a display for notifying the result of the normal symbol lottery is executed in the main effect symbol display area A6. Then, the result of the normal symbol lottery is informed by the combination of the three main effect symbols a6 stopped and displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6.
That is, when the time saving state is occurring, the variable display of the main effect symbol a6 executed in the main effect symbol display area A6 is changed to the variable display of the normal mini effect symbol a4 executed in the normal mini symbol display area A4. Yes. Further, when the time saving state is occurring, the stop display of the main effect pattern a6 executed in the main effect pattern display area A6 is replaced by the stop display of the normal pattern mini effect pattern a4 executed in the normal pattern mini pattern display area A4. Yes.
Specifically, when the time saving state is occurring, during the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device, the main effect symbol display area A6 (each special symbol display area) is displayed as a display corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol. ), the variable display of the main effect symbol a6 is executed. In other words, when the time saving state is occurring, during the variable display of the general mini production pattern a4, as a display corresponding to the variable display of the general mini production pattern a4, the main production design display area A6 (each special display area), the variable display of the main effect symbol a6 is executed. Also, when the time saving state is occurring, during the normal symbol stop display on the normal symbol display device, as a display corresponding to the normal symbol stop display, in the main production symbol display area A6 (each special symbol display area) , the stop display of the main effect symbol a6 is executed. In other words, when the time saving state is occurring, during the stop display of the general mini production pattern a4, the main production pattern display area A6 (each special pattern) is displayed as a display corresponding to the stop display of the general mini production pattern a4 display area), the stop display of the main effect symbol a6 is executed.

In addition, on the display screen 31a, as display areas related to suspension, a pre-variation pending design display area B1, a variable pending design display area B2, a special figure pending number display area B3, a normal figure pending number display area B4, can be configured.
When the normal state is occurring, special figure 1 game information before the special figure hit determination (start determination) is executed (before the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started) in the pre-variation reserved symbol display area B1 is displayed. In addition, when the normal state is occurring, in the variable pending design display area B2, after the special figure hit determination (start determination) is executed (the first special symbol variation display / stop display is being performed) special figure A reserved symbol h corresponding to one game information is displayed.
On the other hand, when the time saving state is occurring, in the pre-variation pending design display area B1, before the normal pattern winning judgment (starting judgment) is executed (before the fluctuation display of the normal pattern is started) To the general pattern game information A corresponding reserved symbol h is displayed. In addition, when the time saving state is occurring, in the variable pending design display area B2, after the normal pattern winning judgment (start judgment) is executed (during the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation display / stop display) general pattern game information is displayed.
The special figure 1 reservation number, which will be described later, is displayed in the special figure reservation number display area B3.
In the general pattern reservation number display area B4, the general pattern reservation number, which will be described later, is displayed.

As described above, during the occurrence of the normal state, an effect for notifying the result of the special symbol lottery is executed by the main effect symbol a6 in the main effect symbol display area A6, and in the reserved symbol display areas B1 and B2. , the reserved symbol h corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 game information) is displayed.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the time saving state, an effect for informing the result of the normal symbol lottery is executed by the main effect symbol a6 in the main effect symbol display area A6, and in the reserved symbol display areas B1 and B2, A reserved symbol h corresponding to the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol game information) is displayed.
Thus, in the pachinko machine 1, during the normal state, the performance for notifying the result of the special symbol lottery is mainly executed, and during the time-saving state, the result of the normal symbol lottery is mainly notified. A production is executed to do so.

The sub-image display device 32 is arranged on the front side of the main image display device 31 .
The sub-image display device 32 is composed of a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT display. The sub-image display device 32 has a display screen 32a capable of displaying effect images.
The sub-image display device 32 can be vertically displaced (moved) by a driving mechanism (not shown). Specifically, the sub-image display device 32 can be displaced within a predetermined range including an origin position (see FIG. 2) and an effect position (not shown) below the origin position. .
The sub image display device 32 arranged (displaced) at the origin position is arranged above the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and does not cover the display screen 31a. On the other hand, the sub-image display device 32 arranged (displaced) at the rendering position is arranged on the front side of the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and covers part of the display screen 31a.

A first starting port 51 is provided in the left path. The first starting port 51 is a ball-entering port (so-called “navel”) that opens upward, and is always capable of entering a game ball. The first starting port 51 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the left path (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the right path).
In the first start port 51, a special figure 1 start port switch 101 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. The special figure 1 starting port switch 101 sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball entered into the first starting port 51 (entering the game ball into the first starting port 51) Output. The main control board 200 executes the first special symbol lottery according to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 .

On the left side of the first starting opening 51 in the left path, an upper left other winning opening 57a, a middle left winning opening 57b, and a lower left winning opening 57c are provided. Each of the other prize winning openings 57a to 57c is a ball entry opening that opens upward, and game balls can be entered at all times. Each of the other prize-winning openings 57a to 57c is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the left path (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the right path).
The game board 11 is provided with a left winning slot switch 106 (see FIG. 3). The left winning hole switch 106 sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the other winning holes 57a to 57c (entering the game ball to the other winning holes 57a to 57c). Output. The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the left winning hole switch 106 .

A large winning opening 55 is provided at the most upstream of the right path. The big winning hole 55 has a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) for a game ball to enter the big winning hole 55, and an open state that makes it possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the big winning hole 55. and a special electric accessory (special electric role) 55a that can be displaced.
The special electric accessory 55a is opened and closed by a special electric accessory solenoid 65 (see FIG. 3). The special electric accessory 55a is normally closed to the big winning port 55, making it impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball, but a small winning game state or a big winning game state is generated. In this case, the special electric accessory 55a is in an open state, and it becomes possible (easy) to enter the game ball. The big winning opening 55 allows entry of game balls flowing down the right path (impossibility of entry of game balls flowing down the left path).
A count switch 103 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the big winning opening 55 . The count switch 103 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the big winning hole 55 (entering the game ball into the big winning hole 55). The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the count switch 103 .
In addition, inside the big winning opening 55, there are a V area (not shown), a discharge area (not shown), and a game ball entering the big winning opening 55 can be placed in either the V area or the discharging area. A sorting means (not shown) for sorting to the area of is provided.
A V-region switch 110 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the V-region. The V area switch 110 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the V area (passage of the game ball through the V area). The main control board 200 sets "1" in the V prize flag area of the RAM 230, which will be described later, according to the input of the detection signal from the V area switch 110. FIG.
The distributing means is displaced between a V passing state in which the game balls entering the big winning opening 55 are distributed to the V area, and a non-V passing state in which the game balls entering the big winning opening 55 are distributed to the discharge area. It is possible to
That is, when the sorting means is displaced to the V passage state, the game ball entering the big winning hole 55 is sorted to the V area. As a result, it becomes impossible for a game ball that has entered the big winning hole 55 to pass through the discharge area.
On the other hand, when the sorting means is displaced to the non-V passing state, the game ball entering the big winning opening 55 is sorted to the discharge area. This makes it impossible for a game ball that has entered the big winning hole 55 to pass through the V area.
The diverting means is displaced by a V-region solenoid 66 (see FIG. 3).
A game ball entering the big winning hole 55 is first detected by the count switch 103, then distributed to either the V region or the discharge region by the distribution means, and after passing through the region , is discharged to the discharge path. At this time, the game balls distributed to the V area are detected by the V area switch 110 .

A second starting opening 52 is provided downstream of the big winning opening 55 in the right path. The second start port 52 has a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the second start port 52, and a state that allows (easy) the entry of the game ball into the second start port 52. An ordinary electric accessory (ordinary electric role) 52a is provided which can be displaced to an open state to open the door.
The normal electric accessory 52a is opened and closed by a normal electric accessory solenoid 64 (see FIG. 3). In the second starting port 52, normally, the normal electric accessory 52a is in a closed state, and it is impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball, but when the normal per game state occurs. Then, the normal electric accessory 52a is opened, and the game ball can be entered. The second starting port 52 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
Inside the second starting port 52, a special figure 2 starting port switch 102 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. The special figure 2 starting port switch 102 sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that entered the second starting port 52 (entering the game ball to the second starting port 52) Output. The main control board 200 executes the second special symbol lottery according to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 .

A starting gate 41 is provided downstream of the second starting port 52 in the right path. The starting gate 41 is formed so that game balls can always pass through it. The starting gate 41 allows passage of game balls flowing down the right path (impossibility of passage of game balls flowing down the left path).
The starting gate 41 is provided with a gate switch 104 (see FIG. 3). The gate switch 104 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the start gate 41 (passage of the start gate 41 by the game ball). The main control board 200 executes a normal symbol lottery according to the input of the detection signal from the gate switch 104 .

A right winning opening 56 is provided downstream of the starting gate 41 in the right path. The right other prize winning port 56 is a ball entrance opening upward, and game balls can be entered at all times. The right other prize winning port 56 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
A right prize winning port switch 105 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the right other prize winning port 56 . The right winning opening switch 105 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball that has entered the other right winning opening 56 (entrance of a gaming ball into the other right winning opening 56). . The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the right winning opening switch 105 .

At the most downstream of the game area 30, an out port 58 is provided for discharging game balls that have not entered (won a prize) in any of the winning ports 51, 52, 55, 56, 57a-57c.
Here, the inner frame unit 3 includes a discharge path (not shown) through which game balls discharged from the game area 30 pass. Specifically, the discharge path is attached to the back side of the inner frame of the inner frame unit 3 . The pachinko machine 1 is configured such that all game balls hit into the game area 30 (all game balls discharged from the game area 30) pass through the discharge path. That is, the game ball launched into the game area 30 enters the game area 30 by entering any of the winning openings 51, 52, 55, 56, 57a to 57c or by passing through the out opening 58. and flows into the discharge channel.
Specifically, the game balls entering the winning holes 51, 52, 55, 56, 57a to 57c are detected by the switches 101, 102, 103, 105, 106, 110 provided in the winning holes. Later, it is guided to the discharge channel. Also, the game ball discharged from the out port 58 is guided to the discharge path.
The inner frame unit 3 is provided with an out switch 109 (see FIG. 3). Then, the out switch 109 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the discharge path (a game ball discharged from the game area 30). As a result, all game balls ejected from the game area 30 are detected by the out switch 109 .
Furthermore, in the game area 30, a plurality of nails (not shown) are arranged so as to guide the game balls to the respective prize winning openings 51, 52, 55, 56, 57a to 57c and the starting gate 41. As shown in FIG.

A main display device 60 is arranged on the game board 11 . The main display device 60 includes a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is composed of a light-emitting element (LED in this embodiment).
Information about the game is displayed on the main display device 60 .
The main display device 60 includes a special figure 1 display device, a special figure 2 display device, a normal figure display device, a special figure 1 reservation display device, a special figure 2 reservation display device, a general figure reservation display device, and a round It is configured including a display device, a right-handed display device, a variable probability display device, and a time saving display device. In addition, in this embodiment, the variable probability display device is not used.
Specifically, the main display device 60 includes 32 lighting elements (LED1 to LED32).
And, in the main display device 60, LED1 ~ LED8 constitutes a special figure 1 display device, LED7 ~ LED16 constitutes a special figure 2 display device, LED17, 18 constitutes a general figure display device, LED19 ~LED23 constitutes a round display device, LED24 constitutes a right-handed display device, LED25 and 26 constitute a special figure 1 reservation display device, LED27 and 28 constitute a special figure 2 reservation display device Then, the LEDs 29 and 30 constitute a normal figure holding display device, the LED 31 constitutes a variable probability display device, and the LED 32 constitutes a time saving display device.

The special figure 1 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the first special symbol consisting of numbers, symbols, and the like. Then, in the special figure 1 display device, the result of the first special symbol lottery is displayed by the stopped and displayed first special symbol.
The special figure 2 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the second special pattern consisting of numbers, patterns, and the like. Then, in the special figure 2 display device, the result of the second special symbol lottery is displayed by the stopped and displayed second special symbol.
Here, the display of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display device and the display of the effect symbols a1 and a2 in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area A2 are displayed in a variable display. , the time when the variable display ends, the time when the stop display starts, and the lottery results indicated by the stopped symbols are associated with each other.
In addition, the display of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 display device, and the display of the effect symbols a1 and a3 in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area A3, the fluctuation display is started The time, the time when the variable display ends, the time when the stop display starts, and the lottery results indicated by the stopped symbols are associated with each other.
Then, when the first special symbol (stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device becomes a specific symbol (jackpot symbol), or the second special symbol stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device ( When the stop symbol) becomes a specific symbol (big win symbol), a big win game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is generated.
In addition, when the second special symbol (stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device becomes a specific symbol (small hit symbol), the small winning game state which is a game state advantageous to the player is changed. occur.
The normal pattern display device can perform variable display and stop display of normal patterns consisting of numbers, patterns, and the like. Then, in the normal pattern display device, the results of the normal pattern lottery are displayed by the stopped normal symbols.
Here, the display of the normal pattern in the normal pattern display device and the display of the production patterns a4 and a5 in the normal pattern mini pattern display area A4 and the normal pattern fourth pattern display area A5 are the timing when the fluctuation display is started, the fluctuation The time when the display ends, the time when the stop display starts, and the lottery results indicated by the symbols stopped and displayed are associated with each other.
Then, when the normal pattern stop-displayed on the normal pattern display device becomes a specific pattern (normal pattern per pattern), the normal pattern per game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is generated.

The special figure 1 reservation display device displays the number of times (special figure 1 reservation number) that the display of the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery is reserved.
The special figure 2 reservation display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is withheld (the number of special figure 2 reservations).
The normal pattern lottery holding display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery is held (the number of normal pattern holdings).
The round display device displays the number of round games executed during the jackpot game state (type of jackpot game state).
The right hitting display device displays the path (left path or right path) along which the game ball should be hit.
As described above, the variable probability display device is not used in this embodiment.
The current game state (executing or stopping the time saving control) is displayed on the time saving display device.

Also, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with one or a plurality of movable units (not shown). In this embodiment, the front frame unit 4 is provided with one or more movable units, and the game board unit 10 is provided with one or more movable units.
Each movable body unit of the front frame unit 4 is arranged on the front surface of the decoration part 4b, the upper surface of the receiving plate unit 5, etc., and is capable of performing a predetermined performance operation.
Each movable unit of the game board unit 10 is attached to the front side of the set board. Specifically, each movable body unit is arranged in a space (hereinafter referred to as “effect space”) between the game board 11 and the main image display device 31 (display screen 31a). Each movable body unit can perform a predetermined performance action in the performance space.
Each movable body unit includes an effect member, a drive mechanism, a drive source, and a position detection sensor 26 (see FIG. 3). In this embodiment, a motor 23 (see FIG. 3) is used as a drive source. The motor 23 is a stepping motor. Note that a configuration using a solenoid as a driving source may be employed.
The effect member can be displaced along a predetermined direction by a drive mechanism. Specifically, the effect member can be displaced to a plurality of positions including an initial position and a effect position. The effect member is driven (displaced) by a motor 23 .

The position detection sensor 26 is configured by a photosensor or the like. A position detection sensor 26 detects the position of the production member. Specifically, the position detection sensor 26 includes a light projecting section and a light receiving section that receives light projected from the light projecting section. And position detection sensor 26 outputs a detection signal to production control board 300 according to light reception (detection) of light projected from a light projection part by a light sensing portion. On the other hand, the position detection sensor 26 stops outputting the detection signal to the performance control board 300 when the light receiving section does not receive (detect) the light projected from the light projecting section.
A shield plate is provided at a predetermined position of the effect member. Then, when the effect member is arranged at the initial position, the shielding plate is arranged between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion of the position detection sensor 26 to block light from entering the light receiving portion. Thereby, when the production member is arranged at the initial position, the output of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 26 to the production control board 300 is stopped. On the other hand, when the production member is not arranged at the initial position, a detection signal is output from the position detection sensor 26 to the production control board 300 .
Thereby, the effect control board 300 can detect whether or not the effect member is arranged at the initial position depending on the input state of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 26 .

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with detection sensors for detecting various abnormal states.
In this embodiment, the detection sensors include a glass frame opening sensor 107 (see FIG. 3), an inner frame opening sensor 108 (see FIG. 3), a vibration detection sensor 113 (see FIG. 3), and a radio wave detection sensor 114 (see FIG. 3). , a magnetic detection sensor 115 (see FIG. 3) and the like are provided.
The glass frame opening sensor 107 detects opening of the front frame unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3 . Then, the glass frame opening sensor 107 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 according to the opening of the front frame unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3 .
The inner frame open sensor 108 detects opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2 . Then, the inner frame opening sensor 108 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 according to the opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2 .
The vibration detection sensor 113 detects vibration of the game board 11 . In this embodiment, the vibration detection sensor 113 is arranged on the game board 11 . Then, the vibration detection sensor 113 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of vibration of the game board 11 .
The radio wave detection sensor 114 detects radio waves generated around the game board 11 . In this embodiment, two radio wave detection sensors 114 are arranged on the game board 11 . Each radio wave detection sensor 114 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of radio waves.
The magnetism detection sensor 115 detects magnetism generated around the game board 11 . In this embodiment, three magnetic detection sensors 115 are arranged. Specifically, one magnetic detection sensor 115 is arranged in the inner frame unit 3 (discharge path). Also, two magnetic detection sensors 115 are arranged on the game board 11 . Then, the magnetic detection sensor 115 arranged in the inner frame unit 3 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to detection of magnetism. Further, each magnetic detection sensor 115 arranged on the game board 11 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in accordance with detection of magnetism.

(Control system configuration)
Next, the configuration of the control system in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachinko machine.
The pachinko machine 1 includes various control boards.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 1 supplies power (electric power) to the main control board 200, the performance control board 300, the payout control board 400, and the respective control boards 200, 300, 400, etc. It has a plurality of control boards such as a power supply board 600, a driver board 310, a sub-connection board 320, and the like.
The plurality of control boards 200, 300, 400, 600 are independent (separate) circuit boards. Further, each control board 200, 300, 400, 600 is accommodated in a separate board case (main board case 250, etc., which will be described later).
The main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are included in the game board unit 10 . Specifically, the main control board 200 and the effect control board 300 are attached to the back side of the game board 11 .
The payout control board 400 is included in the inner frame unit 3 . Specifically, the payout control board 400 is attached to the back side of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3 .

(Configuration of main control board 200)
First, the configuration of the main control board 200 will be described.
The main control board 200 controls the progress of the game.
The main control board 200 includes a one-chip microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer), a clock generation circuit 202, a random number generation circuit 203, an input port 204, an output port 205, a performance display device 206, a RAM clear switch 207, a setting key switch 208, and a sink. It includes a driver 240, source drivers 250a and 250b, and the like.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI integrated with a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, and the like. Specifically, the one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU 210, a ROM 220, a RAM 230, and the like.

The main control board 200 includes a memory area used by the CPU 210 . The memory area used by the CPU 210 includes a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the ROM 220 and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the RAM 230 .

The ROM 220 (memory area of the ROM 220) includes a used area m1 (0000H to 1A7AH) and an unused area m2 (2000H to 2BFFH).
The used area m1 includes a program area, an unused area, and a data area. The program area stores a program (program code) for controlling the progress of the game. The data area stores data (program data) for controlling the progress of the game. Note that the used area m1 may be configured without an unused area.
The unused area m2 includes a program area and a data area.
The program area includes a program (program code) for executing processing related to the test defined by the game machine regulations, and a program (program code) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 (specifically, calculating the base ratio). code) and are stored. The data area stores data (program data) for executing processing related to tests defined by gaming machine regulations and data (program data) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 .
The ROM 220 also has an unused area, a ROM comment area, a program management area, etc., in addition to the used area m1 and the non-used area m2.
Arbitrary data such as program titles and versions are stored in the ROM comment area. On the other hand, the program management area stores information necessary for the CPU 210 to execute various programs.
Further, in the ROM 220, an unused area m3 of predetermined bytes (for example, 16 bytes or more) is provided between the used area m1 and the unused area m2. This clarifies the boundary between the use area m1 and the non-use area m2.

The RAM 230 (memory area of the RAM 230) includes a used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) and an unused area M2 (F300H to F3FFH).
The use area M1 includes a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. On the other hand, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. Note that the used area M1 may be configured without including an unused area.
Specifically, the work area includes a set value area, a gaming machine status flag area, a checksum area, a backup flag area, an error related area, a normal game related area 1, and a normal game related area 2. is composed of
A setting value is stored in the setting value area. A gaming machine status flag is stored in the gaming machine status flag area. A checksum is stored in the checksum area. A backup flag is stored in the backup flag area. Information about errors is stored in the error-related area. The normal game-related area 1 stores a sub-command pointer and the like. The normal game-related area 2 stores input/output data in the main control board 200, data for arithmetic processing, various counters (random number counter, timer counter, etc.), lottery results, flags for managing the game state, and the like. In particular, the normal game-related area 2 is a special figure 1 starter switch 101, a special figure 2 starter switch 102, and a region for storing game information acquired with the input of a detection signal from each of the gate switch 104 (Game information storage area described later), a special figure 1 display pattern counter, a special figure 2 display pattern counter, a normal figure display pattern counter and the like are included.
The unused area M2 includes a work area and a stack area.
The work area is a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing processing related to tests defined by game machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). It is used as an area for temporarily storing various data. On the other hand, the stack area is during execution of a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing processing related to tests defined by gaming machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). In addition, it is used as an area to temporarily save various data.
Specifically, the work area includes a performance display related area. The performance display related area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during the execution of the program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. FIG.
In addition, the RAM 230 is provided with an unused area M3 of predetermined bytes (16 bytes or more) between the used area M1 and the unused area M2. This clarifies the boundary between the used area M1 and the non-used area M2.

In this embodiment, it is permitted to refer to the data stored in the non-use area M2 in the process based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1.
On the other hand, it is prohibited to rewrite (change) the data stored in the non-use area M2 by processing based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. there is
Also, in the processing based on the program stored in the non-use area m2 (the program for executing the processing related to the test specified by the game machine regulations, or the program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206), the use area It is permitted to refer to the data stored in M1.
On the other hand, by processing based on the program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing processing related to the test specified by the gaming machine regulations, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206), the use area The data stored in M1 is prohibited from being rewritten (changed).
A game in the pachinko machine 1 can be progressed (completed) by a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1.

The clock generation circuit 202 generates a clock (synchronization signal) at a predetermined clock frequency (12 [MHz] in this embodiment) and outputs this clock to the CPU 210 and the random number generation circuit 203 respectively.
A random number generating circuit 203 includes a first loop counter for generating a winning random number for the normal symbol lottery, a second loop counter for generating a big winning random number for the first special symbol lottery, and a second loop counter for generating a big winning random number for the second special symbol lottery. It includes a 3rd loop counter and a 4th loop counter that generates a reach group random number.
The first loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (within the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment) each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. A winning random number for a normal pattern lottery is generated. In this embodiment, the value of the first loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).
The second loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (within the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment) each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. A jackpot random number for the first special symbol lottery is generated. In this embodiment, the value of the second loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).

The third loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (within the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment) each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. A jackpot random number for the second special symbol lottery is generated. In this embodiment, the value of the third loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).
The fourth loop counter keeps the value of the loop counter within a predetermined range (0 to 10006 in this embodiment) every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (once at the clock frequency divided by 32). within range) to generate a reach group random number. In this embodiment, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated every 2.666 [μs] (32 [s]/12 [MHz]=2.666 [μs]).

The input port 204 includes a plurality of input ports (input port 0 to input port 3 in this embodiment).
Input port 0 receives a detection signal from the glass frame opening sensor 107, a detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108, a detection signal from the vibration detection sensor 113, a detection signal from one of the radio wave detection sensors 114, and a magnetic detection sensor 115. A detection signal or the like from is input.
Input port 1 receives a RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, a detection signal from the setting key switch 208, and the like.
The input port 2 receives a detection signal from the count switch 103, a detection signal from the right winning slot switch 105, a detection signal from the left winning slot switch 106, a detection signal from the out switch 109, and a signal from the radio wave detection sensor 114 on the other side. A detection signal or the like is input.
To the input port 3, the detection signal from the special figure 1 starter switch 101, the detection signal from the special figure 2 starter switch 102, the detection signal from the gate switch 104, the detection signal from the V area switch 110, etc. are input. be.
Each input port (input port 0 to input port 3) is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor (detection signal). In the reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor, 1-bit data indicating the reception state of the detection signal from the switch/sensor is set.
Specifically, in the reception storage area corresponding to each switch sensor, "1" is set when the detection signal from the switch sensor is input (high level). "0" is set when the detection signal from is not input (low level).

The output port 205 includes a plurality of output ports (output port 0 to output port 4 in this embodiment).
The output port 0 outputs data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the main display device 60 . A data signal output from the output port 0 is input to the source driver 250a.
The output port 1 outputs common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) for controlling lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206 . A common signal output from the output port 1 is input to the sink driver 240 .
Output port 2 outputs an external signal. At this time, the external signal output from the output port 2 is input to the hall computer via the payout control board 400 and the external terminal board 450 .
The output port 3 outputs a control signal for controlling the drive of the normal electric accessory solenoid 64, a control signal for controlling the drive of the special electric accessory solenoid 65, a control signal for controlling the V-region solenoid 66, etc. Output.
The output port 4 outputs data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the performance display device 206 . A data signal output from the output port 4 is input to the source driver 250b.

Also, the main control board 200 is configured to include a command output port 1 and a command output port 2 . Then, the CPU 210 transmits a control command (subcommand) from the command output port 1 to the performance control board 300, and transmits a control command (payout command) to the payout control board 400 from the command output port 2. do.
Command output port 1 and command output port 2 each include a transmission data register (not shown), a FIFO (First In First Out) buffer (not shown), a transmission shift register (not shown), have.
The transmission data register outputs the control command input based on the subcommand transmission process (step S2-4) described later to the FIFO buffer.
The FIFO buffer is composed of multiple registers and is capable of storing multiple control commands. The FIFO buffer stores the control commands input from the transmission data register and outputs the stored control commands to the transmission shift register in the input order.
The transmission shift register performs parallel-serial conversion on the control command input from the FIFO buffer, and transmits it to the effect control board 300 or the payout control board 400 as serial data.

Performance display device 206 includes a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is composed of a light-emitting element (LED in this embodiment). It should be noted that the performance display device 206 is arranged on the back side of the game board 11, so that it cannot be visually recognized by the player.
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the state of the game machine (hereinafter referred to as "game machine state") includes a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting error state, and a RAM error state. and a backup abnormal state are defined. The information displayed on the performance display device 206 changes according to the gaming machine state that has occurred.

The performance display device 206 includes four (four-digit) display units (not shown). Each display section is composed of eight lighting elements. That is, each display unit is composed of a 7-segment LED capable of displaying numbers, symbols, etc., and a dot-segment LED capable of displaying dots such as a decimal point.
Specifically, the performance display device 206 includes 32 lighting elements (LED33 to LED64). In the performance display device 206, LED33 to LED40 are the first digit display section, LED41 to LED48 are the second digit display section, LED49 to LED56 are the third digit display section, and LED57 to LED64. is the fourth digit display.

A game can be played while the playable state is being generated. Then, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 while the playable state is occurring.
In this embodiment, while the playable state is occurring, the performance display device 206 changes the first base ratio and the second base ratio every predetermined time (5.0 [s] in this embodiment). , are displayed alternately.
The “first base ratio” is the base ratio of the current section (the base ratio calculated for the period from the start of the current section to the current time).
The “second base ratio” is the base ratio of the previous section (the final base ratio calculated for the previous section).
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information for identifying the type of base ratio (first base ratio or second base ratio) is displayed by the upper two-digit display portion of the four-digit display portion. A number indicating the base ratio (percentage) is displayed by the lower two digits of the display.

While the setting change state is occurring, the setting value can be changed. While the setting change state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information indicating that the setting change state is occurring is displayed by the display portion of the upper three digits of the display portion of the four digits (specifically, ""n." is displayed in the upper two digits, and "-" is displayed in the upper third digit. be done.
While the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting value can be confirmed. While the setting confirmation state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring is displayed by the upper three-digit display section of the four-digit display section (specifically, ""r" is displayed in the upper two digits, and "n." be.

The game cannot progress while the game stop state (setting error state, RAM error state, and backup error state) is occurring. Then, while the game stop state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information indicating that the game stop state is occurring is displayed by the display portion of the upper three digits of the display portion of the four digits (specifically, information indicating that the game stop state is occurring (specifically, ""E" is displayed in the upper two digits, "r." A number indicating the error code corresponding to the status) is displayed.

The RAM clear switch 207 is a tactile switch. In other words, the RAM clear switch 207 includes an operation unit that can be pressed. The RAM clear switch 207 outputs a RAM clear signal to the input port 1 when the operation unit is pressed.
The setting key switch 208 is a key lock switch. In other words, the setting key switch 208 includes an operation section provided with a keyhole. The operation unit is unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole, and can be rotated (switched) from the OFF state to the ON state. The setting key switch 208 outputs a detection signal to the input port 1 when the operation unit is in the ON state.

The sink driver 240 controls the output of common signals to the respective display devices 60 and 206 according to the common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) output from the output port 1. FIG.
The source driver 250a controls the output of data signals to the main display device 60 according to the data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 0. FIG.
The source driver 250b controls the output of data signals to the performance display device 206 according to the data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 4. FIG.
Thus, the source driver 250a and the sink driver 240 control the lighting of the lighting elements (LED1 to LED32) included in the main display device 60. FIG.
Also, the source driver 250b and the sink driver 240 control the lighting of the lighting elements (LED33 to LED64) included in the performance display device 206. FIG.

The main control board 200 also includes a test signal output circuit (not shown).
CPU210, in the test signal output process (step S4-24) to be described later, to generate test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (jackpot game state, execution state of time saving control, probability state of special symbol lottery, etc.) and stores the generated test signal in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . As a result, the test signal stored in the port output request buffer is output from the predetermined output port. A test signal output from a predetermined output port is input to an interface board of a test computer (not shown) via a test signal output circuit.
Also, in the main control board 200, the detection signal from the special figure 1 starter switch 101, the detection signal from the special figure 2 starter switch 102, the detection signal from the gate switch 104, the detection signal from the count switch 103, the right prize A detection signal from the opening switch 105, a detection signal from the left winning opening switch 106, a detection signal from the out switch 109, etc. are input to the input port 204, and sent to the computer for testing via the test signal output circuit. Input to the interface board.
Furthermore, in the main control board 200, a control signal for controlling the driving of each solenoid (ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64, special electric accessory solenoid 65, V area solenoid 66, etc.) output from the output port 3 is It is input to the solenoids 64, 65, 66 and to the interface board of the computer for testing via the test signal output circuit.

(Configuration of payout control board 400)
Next, the configuration of the payout control board 400 will be described.
The payout control board 400 controls the shooting of game balls to the game area 30 and the payout of game balls.
The payout control board 400 includes a one-chip microcomputer.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI integrated with a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, and the like. Specifically, a one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and the like.
The payout control board 400 controls the game ball payout operation by the game ball payout device 440 based on the control command received from the main control board 200 and the ball lending instruction signal received from the CR unit.
Also, the payout control board 400 controls the game ball shooting operation of the game ball shooting device 430 based on the detection signal input from the shooting volume 410 . Specifically, the shooting operation of the game ball by the game ball shooting device 430 is controlled so that the game ball is shot to the game area 30 with the intensity corresponding to the detection signal input from the shooting volume 410 .

(Configuration of production control board 300)
Next, the configuration of the effect control board 300 will be described.
The production control board 300 controls production.
The effect control board 300 is configured including a one-chip microcomputer.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI integrated with a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, and the like. Specifically, the one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a VDP, a sound processor, an illumination controller, a motor controller, and the like.
Based on the control command received from the main control board 200, the effect control board 300 displays the effect images on the various image display devices 31 and 32, lights the various lamps 20 and 21, outputs sounds from the various speakers 22, and performs various movements. It controls the driving of the motor 23 that drives the body unit.

The ROM of the effect control board 300 stores a program relating to the progress of the effect, data necessary for the progress of the effect, and the like.
The RAM of the effect control board 300 temporarily stores control commands received from the main control board 200, data for arithmetic processing, and the like.
The CPU of the effect control board 300 determines the effect contents to be executed based on the control command received from the main control board 200, and sets the effect program (effect control table) corresponding to the determined effect contents.
The VDP generates display control data (display control signal) according to an effect program (effect control table) set by the CPU, and outputs the generated display control data to various image display devices 31 and 32 .
The sound processor generates sound control data (sound control signal) according to a performance program (performance control table) set by the CPU, and sends the generated sound control data to a digital audio power amplifier (not shown). Output. Then, the digital audio power amplifier generates control signals corresponding to the various speakers 22 based on the sound control data input from the sound processor, and transmits the generated control signals to the various speakers 22 via the sub connection board 320. Output for
The lighting controller generates lamp control data (lamp control signal) according to a production program (production control table) set by the CPU, and sends the generated lamp control data to the driver board 310 and the sub-connection board 320 respectively. Output for
The motor controller generates motor control data (motor control signal) according to an effect program (effect control table) set by the CPU, and sends the generated motor control data to each of the driver board 310 and the sub-connection board 320. output.

The driver board 310 includes a motor driver (not shown) and a lamp driver (not shown).
The motor control data output from the performance control board 300 is input to the motor driver. Then, according to the motor control data input from the performance control board 300, the motor driver provides an excitation signal (drive current) output.
The lamp control data output from the effect control board 300 is input to the lamp driver. Then, the lamp driver controls the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element group of each system that constitutes the board surface lamp 21 according to the lamp control data input from the effect control board 300 .
The sub connection board 320 includes a motor driver (not shown) and a lamp driver (not shown).
The motor control data output from the performance control board 300 is input to the motor driver. Then, according to the motor control data input from the performance control board 300, the motor driver provides an excitation signal (drive current) output.
The lamp control data output from the effect control board 300 is input to the lamp driver. Then, the lamp driver controls the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element group of each system that constitutes the frame lamp 20 according to the lamp control data input from the effect control board 300 .

(Regarding gaming machine status)
In the pachinko machine 1, six states (specifically, playable state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, setting error state, RAM error state, and backup error state) are defined as gaming machine states. .
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a gaming machine state flag area. In the gaming machine status flag area, six gaming machine statuses (specifically, playable status, setting change status, setting confirmation status, setting error status, RAM error status, and backup error status) are displayed as gaming machine status flags. ), a value corresponding to any one gaming machine state is stored (set). Then, in the pachinko machine 1, a gaming machine state corresponding to the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is generated.
The "playable state" is a gaming machine state in which a game can be played.
Execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is permitted while the game-enabled state is occurring. As a result, the game (regular game and special game) can be progressed.
Also, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 while the playable state is occurring. In addition, information about the game is displayed on the main display device 60 .

The “setting change state” is a game machine state in which the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 can be changed.
The configuration change state occurs when the configuration change condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, the detection signal from the inner frame open sensor 108 is input, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208 is input, and the detection from the RAM clear switch 207 The setting change condition is established when the signal is input. That is, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the setting change state occurs. be done.
While the setting change state is occurring, execution of the processing of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited. As a result, the game (specifically, normal game and special game) is stopped.
Also, while the setting change state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored in the setting value area. Also, all the lighting elements forming the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
Furthermore, by pressing the RAM clear switch 207 while the setting change state is occurring, the setting value stored in the setting value area can be changed. When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is being generated, the game ready state is generated instead of the setting change state. As a result, the set value stored in the set value area is determined.

The “setting confirmation state” is a game machine state in which the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 can be confirmed.
The set-verify state occurs when the set-verify condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, the detection signal from the inner frame open sensor 108 is input, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208 is input, and the detection from the RAM clear switch 207 The setting confirmation condition is met when no signal is input. That is, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is not pressed, the setting confirmation state occurs. be done.
Execution of the processing of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited while the setting confirmation state is occurring. As a result, the game (specifically, normal game and special game) is stopped.
Also, while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored in the setting value area. This makes it possible to confirm the set value stored in the set value area. Also, all the lighting elements forming the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
Note that the set values stored in the set value area cannot be changed while the setting confirmation state is occurring.
When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting confirmation state is being generated, the game ready state is generated instead of the setting confirmation state.

The "setting error state" is a gaming machine state in which a setting error has occurred.
The abnormal setting state is generated when it is determined that the set value set in the set value area is not within the specified range while the playable state is being generated.
Execution of the processing of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited while the setting error state is occurring. As a result, the game (specifically, normal game and special game) is stopped.
Further, while the abnormal setting state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays an error code designating the occurrence of the abnormal setting. Also, all the lighting elements forming the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the setting error state, it is necessary to execute power shutdown and power on to cause a setting change state.

"RAM abnormal state" is a gaming machine state in which a RAM abnormality occurs.
The RAM abnormal state occurs when it is determined that a read/write abnormality has occurred in the RAM 230 when the power is turned on.
Execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited while the RAM abnormal state is occurring. As a result, the game (specifically, normal game and special game) is stopped.
Further, while the RAM abnormality state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays an error code designating the occurrence of the RAM abnormality. Also, all the lighting elements forming the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the RAM abnormal state, it is necessary to execute power shutdown and power on to cause the setting change state.

The “backup abnormality state” is a gaming machine state in which a backup abnormality has occurred.
The backup abnormality state is generated when it is determined that a backup abnormality of the RAM 230 (specifically, a backup flag abnormality or a checksum abnormality) has occurred when the power is turned on.
Execution of the processing of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, is prohibited while the backup abnormal state is occurring. As a result, the game (specifically, normal game and special game) is stopped.
Further, while the backup abnormality state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays an error code designating the occurrence of the backup abnormality. Also, all the lighting elements forming the main display device 60 are extinguished. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the backup abnormal state, it is necessary to execute power shutdown and power on to cause a setting change state.

(About setting value)
Next, setting values (setting information) set in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
"Set value" is information that designates the probability of winning a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery). In this embodiment, values from "0" to "5" are defined as the set values.
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a set value area. Any one of "0" to "5" is stored (set) in the setting value area as the setting value. Then, the probability of winning the special symbol lottery is determined according to the value set in the set value area.
In this embodiment, the probability of winning the "jackpot" by the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery) changes according to the value set in the set value area.
The probability of winning the special symbol lottery corresponding to each setting value (probability of winning the "jackpot") is set to the winning probability corresponding to the setting value = "5" and the setting value = "4" in order from the highest winning probability. Winning probability corresponding to set value = "3" Winning probability corresponding to set value = "2" Winning probability corresponding to set value = "1" Winning probability corresponding to set value = "0" Winning probability (winning probability "high" → winning probability "low").

Especially, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to change (select) the setting value stored in the setting value area while the setting change state is occurring. Here, the change of the setting value is executed by the administrator of the pachinko machine 1 (such as an employee of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed).
That is, as described above, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is opened, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the setting A modified state is raised.
While the setting change state is occurring, the performance display device 206 displays the setting values stored in the setting value area. Further, each time the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the set value stored in the set value area is changed. At this time, when the setting value set in the setting value area is changed, the setting value displayed on the performance display device 206 is also changed accordingly.
When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is being generated, the game ready state is generated instead of the setting change state. As a result, the set value stored in the set value area is determined.

(About base ratio)
In the pachinko machine 1, the base ratio (base value) is calculated by the CPU 210 while the playable state is occurring. In this embodiment, the base ratio is calculated only during the occurrence of a predetermined game state (specifically, during the occurrence of the special figure low probability state and during the stop of the time saving control).
Then, the calculated base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 while the playable state is occurring.
The "base ratio" is the number of game balls launched into the game area 30, and the number of game balls to a predetermined ball entrance (in this embodiment, the start openings 51, 52 and other winning openings 56, 57a to 57c). The information is calculated based on the number of prize balls paid out according to the number of incoming balls. Specifically, the base ratio is the ratio (percentage) of the number of payouts (the number of paid out prize balls) to the number of out balls (the number of game balls that have been hit).
In the present embodiment, the base ratio is calculated for each predetermined section (period). As the predetermined section, a section in which a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 60000 [balls]) of out balls is detected (discharged) is defined. That is, each section starts when the previous section ends, and ends when the number of out-balls detected during the current section reaches a predetermined number (60000 [balls]). Then, the CPU 210 calculates the base ratio at any time (in real time) during each interval.
It should be noted that a predetermined period of time may be defined as the predetermined section. That is, the CPU 210 may be configured to calculate the base ratio for each predetermined time.
"Number of out balls" refers to the number of out balls. “Out ball” refers to a game ball ejected from the game area 30 . Specifically, the out ball is a game ball that has passed through the discharge path (a game ball detected by the out switch 109).
In addition, the game ball discharged from the out port 58 may be used as an out ball. Specifically, the out switch 109 may be configured to detect only the game ball discharged from the out port 58, and the game ball detected by the out switch 109 may be the out ball.
The "number of payouts" refers to the total number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of game balls into the starting ports 51, 52 and the other winning ports 56, 57a-57c.

(About game state)
Next, game states defined by the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute time-saving control as auxiliary control that is advantageous to the player. In the following description, the game state in which the time saving control is stopped is referred to as "normal state". Moreover, let the game state in execution of time saving control be "time saving state."
During the execution of the time saving control (during the occurrence of the time saving state), compared with the stop of the time saving control (during the occurrence of the normal state), in the normal figure per game state described later, the game ball to the second start port 52 It becomes easier to enter the ball, which is advantageous to the player.
Specifically, during the execution of time-saving control (while the time-saving state is occurring), compared to when the time-saving control is stopped (during the normal state), when the normal pattern lottery wins the "normal pattern" , the probability of selecting a "long opening pattern", which will be described later, is high as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 52a.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the "normal pattern" by the normal symbol lottery does not change according to the game state. That is, the probability of winning "per normal pattern" by the normal pattern lottery is the same during the execution of the time saving control (during the time saving state) and during the stop of the time saving control (during the normal state). there is
Further, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the "big hit" or "small hit" by the special symbol lottery does not change according to the game state.

(Regarding various lotteries)
Next, various lotteries executed by the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 4 is a diagram showing winning probabilities of various lotteries. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing winning types of the normal symbol lottery. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing winning types of the special symbol lottery.
In addition, FIG. 4(a) shows the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery, FIG. 4(b) shows the winning probability of the first special symbol lottery, and FIG. 4(c) shows the winning probability of the second special symbol lottery. indicates probability. In addition, FIG. 5 shows the winning type (type of "normal pattern per pattern") selected when "normal per pattern" is won by normal pattern lottery. Furthermore, FIG. 6(a) shows the winning type (type of "big hit design") selected when the "big hit" is won by the first special design lottery, and FIG. 6(b) shows the second special design. Fig. 6(c) shows the winning type (type of "big hit pattern") selected when the "big hit" is won by lottery, and Fig. 6(c) is selected when the "small hit" is won by the second special pattern lottery. It shows the winning type (type of "small hit pattern").

In the pachinko machine 1, a normal symbol lottery is executed when a game ball passes through a starting gate 41.例文帳に追加
In this embodiment, only "per normal pattern" is defined as a result of the normal symbol lottery. It should be noted that, as a result of the normal symbol lottery, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which "per normal pattern" and "lost" are stipulated.
As shown in FIG. 4(a), in the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern hit/loss determination), the probability of winning the "normal pattern hit" is 1/1. In this embodiment, the probability of winning the "normal pattern" by the normal symbol lottery does not change according to the game state. It should be noted that, rather than the probability of winning the "normal pattern lottery" by the normal pattern lottery that is executed during the occurrence of the normal state, the probability of winning the "normal pattern lottery" by the normal pattern lottery that is executed during the occurrence of the time saving state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the height is higher.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the pachinko machine 1, as the winning type (type of "normal pattern winning pattern") selected when "normal winning pattern" is won by the normal symbol lottery, "normal pattern winning pattern 1" is selected. , and "per pattern 2 per normal pattern" are defined.
In the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern stop design judgment), if you win the "normal pattern per pattern", the probability of winning the "normal pattern per pattern 1" is 64880/65536, and the "normal pattern per pattern 2" is won. The probability is 656/65536.
When the "normal pattern per pattern 1" is won, the stop pattern corresponding to the normal pattern "normal per pattern 1" is stop-displayed in the general pattern display device. In particular, when winning the "normal pattern per pattern 1" based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, in the general pattern mini symbol display area A4 and the general pattern 4th symbol display area A5, "lost pattern ” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when winning the "normal pattern per pattern 1" based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state, in the general pattern mini symbol display area A4 and the general pattern 4th symbol display area A5, "lost pattern is stop-displayed, and the stop-symbol corresponding to the "lost-symbol" is stop-displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6.
Here, the "missing pattern" stop-displayed in the normal-figure mini-symbol display area A4 and the normal-figure fourth design display area A5 is, for example, stop-displayed in the three normal-figure display areas of the general-figure mini-symbol display area A4. The number (identification information) indicated by the general mini effect pattern a4, such as "1, 6, 9", which is stopped in at least one general pattern display area, is displayed in another general pattern display The combination is different from the number (identification information) indicated by the normal-figure mini effect pattern a4 stopped and displayed in the area, and the normal-figure fourth effect pattern a5 stop-displayed in the normal-figure fourth pattern display area A5 is "x". shall be displayed.
On the other hand, the "hit pattern" stop-displayed in the general mini-symbol display area A4 and the 4th general-design symbol display area A5 is, for example, stopped in the three general-design mini-symbol display areas A4. The general pattern mini production pattern a4 is aligned with the general pattern mini production pattern a4 indicating the same number (identification information) such as "1, 1, 1", and the general pattern stopped and displayed in the general pattern 4th pattern display area A5. The display mode is such that the fourth production pattern a5 in the figure shows "O".
In addition, the "missing symbols" stopped and displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6 are, for example, three main effect symbols a6 stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas, such as "1, 6, 9". A display in which the number (identification information) indicated by the main effect symbol a6 stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area is combined differently from the number (identification information) indicated by the main effect symbol a6 stopped and displayed in the other effect symbol display areas. mode.
On the other hand, the "win symbols" stopped and displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6 are, for example, three main effect symbols a6 stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas having the same numbers such as "1, 1, 1". It is a display mode that is a combination that is aligned with the general pattern mini production pattern a4 indicating (identification information).
When the "normal pattern winning pattern 2" is won, the stop pattern corresponding to the normal pattern "normal pattern winning pattern 2" is stop-displayed in the normal pattern display device. In particular, when winning the "normal pattern per pattern 2" based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, in the general pattern mini symbol display area A4 and the general pattern 4th symbol display area A5, "lost pattern ” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the "normal pattern per pattern 2" is won based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state, in the general pattern mini symbol display area A4 and the general pattern 4th symbol display area A5, "hit pattern is stop-displayed, and the stop-symbols corresponding to the "winning design" are stop-displayed in the main effect design display area A6.

In the case of winning the "normal pattern per pattern"("normal per pattern 1" or "normal per pattern 2"), the general per pattern game state is generated. In the normal game state, the normal electric accessory 52a is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the second start port 52 (easily).
In this embodiment, "short open pattern" and "long open pattern" are defined as the types of open pattern (open mode/open/close mode) of the normal electric accessary product 52a during the occurrence of the normal per game state. ing.
"Short opening pattern" is an opening pattern (opening mode/opening/closing mode) that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 during the normal game state. In the "short open pattern", compared to the "long open pattern", the time during which the normal electric accessory 52a is in the open state during the normal per game state is shorter. Specifically, in the "short opening pattern", the number of times the normal electric accessory 52a is opened is set to 1 [times], and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 52a at each time is set to 0.1 [s]. be.
The "long opening pattern" is an opening pattern (opening mode/opening/closing mode) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 during the normal game state. In the "long open pattern", compared to the "short open pattern", the time during which the normal electric accessory 52a is in the open state during the normal per game state is longer. Specifically, in the "long opening pattern", the number of times the normal electric accessory 52a is opened is set to 1 [times], and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 52a at each time is set to 5.0 [s]. be.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), when the "normal pattern per pattern 1" is elected based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, the normal electric power is generated during the normal per game state. A "short release pattern" is selected and set as the release pattern of the accessory 52a. On the other hand, when the "normal pattern per pattern 2" is won based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 52a during the generation of the general per pattern game state, "Short release pattern" is selected and set. As a result, when a ``normal pattern hit'' is won based on the normal pattern lottery executed while the normal state is occurring, the ``short opening pattern'' is selected and set with a probability of 1/1.
On the other hand, when the "normal pattern per pattern 1" is won based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state, as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 52a during the generation of the general per pattern game state, "Short release pattern" is selected and set. On the other hand, when the "normal pattern per pattern 2" is won based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state, as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 52a during the occurrence of the general pattern per game state, "Long release pattern" is selected and set. As a result, when the "normal pattern win" is won based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state, the "long open pattern" is selected and set with a probability of 656/65536.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, the first special symbol lottery is executed when the game ball enters the first starting port 51, and the second special symbol lottery is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 52. A special pattern lottery is executed.
In this embodiment, "big win" and "loss" are defined as the results of the first special symbol lottery. On the other hand, as a result of the second special symbol lottery, "big win", "minor win", and "lose" are defined. In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to win the "small hit" only in the second special symbol lottery without winning the "small hit" in the first special symbol lottery. However, in the first special symbol lottery, there may be a configuration in which the "small hit" can be won at a lower probability than in the second special symbol lottery.
In this embodiment, the probability of winning the ``small hit'' by the second special symbol lottery is higher than the probability of winning the ``big hit'' by the second special symbol lottery, and the second special symbol lottery results in a ``loss''. less than probable. In particular, the probability of winning the "small hit" by the second special symbol lottery is lower than 50[%]. As a result, it is possible to set the probability of winning the "small hit" by the second special symbol lottery to an appropriate probability.
As shown in FIGS. 4(b) and 4(c), in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery), the probability of winning the "jackpot" is 326/65536. On the other hand, the probability of being "lost" by the first special symbol lottery is 65208/65536. Also, the probability of winning the "small hit" by the second special symbol lottery is 32440/65536. On the other hand, the probability of being "lost" by the second special symbol lottery is 32768/65536. In this embodiment, the probability of winning a "big win" or "minor win" by a special symbol lottery does not change according to the game state, and does not change according to the set value. It should be noted that the probability of winning the "big hit" by the special symbol lottery may be changed according to the set value.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), in the pachinko machine 1, only "jackpot pattern 1" is selected as a winning type (type of "jackpot pattern") when a "jackpot" is won by the first special pattern lottery. is stipulated.
In the first special symbol lottery (special symbol determination), the probability of winning the "big win symbol 1" is 1/1 when the "big win" is won.
When the "big hit pattern 1" is won, the stop pattern corresponding to the "big hit pattern 1" is stop-displayed on the special figure 1 display device. In particular, when the "jackpot pattern 1" is won based on the first special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area A2, The stop symbol corresponding to the "symbol" is stop-displayed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the "win symbol" is stop-displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6. On the other hand, when the "jackpot pattern 1" is won based on the first special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state, in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area A2, A stop symbol corresponding to "symbol" is stopped and displayed.
Here, the "hit pattern" stop-displayed in the special-figure mini-symbol display area A1 and the special-figure 1 fourth design display area A2 is, for example, stop-displayed in the three special-figure display areas of the special-figure mini-symbol display area A1. The special-figure mini effect pattern a1 is aligned with the special-figure mini effect pattern a1 showing the same number (identification information) such as "7, 7, 7", and is stopped and displayed in the special-figure 1 fourth design display area A2. It is assumed that the special figure 4th production pattern a2 is a display mode showing "◯".
In addition, the "win symbols" stopped and displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6 are, for example, the main effect symbols a6 stopped and displayed in the three effect symbol display areas are the same numbers such as "7, 7, 7". The display mode is such that the main effect pattern a6 indicating (identification information) is aligned.

As shown in FIG. 6(b), in the pachinko machine 1, only "jackpot pattern 2" is selected as a winning type (type of "jackpot pattern") when a "jackpot" is won by the second special pattern lottery. is stipulated.
In the second special symbol lottery (special symbol determination), the probability of winning the "big win symbol 2" is 1/1 when the "big win" is won.
When the "big hit design 2" is won, the stop design corresponding to the "big hit design 2" is stop-displayed on the special figure 2 display device. In particular, when the "jackpot pattern 2" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, the "hit The stop symbol corresponding to the "symbol" is stop-displayed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the "win symbol" is stop-displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6. On the other hand, when the "jackpot design 2" is won based on the second special design lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state, in the special mini design display area A1 and the special design 2 fourth design display area A3, "hit A stop symbol corresponding to "symbol" is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 6(c), in the pachinko machine 1, as the winning type (type of "small winning design") selected when "small winning" is won by the second special design lottery, "small winning design 1” is specified.
In the second special symbol lottery (special symbol determination), the probability of winning the "small winning symbol 1" is 1/1 when the "small winning" is won.
When the "small winning design 1" is won, the stop design corresponding to the "small winning design 1" is stop-displayed in the special figure 2 display device. In particular, when winning the "small hit design 1" based on the second special design lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, in the special design mini design display area A1 and the special design 2 fourth design display area A3, " The stop symbol corresponding to the winning symbol is stop-displayed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the winning symbol is stop-displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6. On the other hand, when winning the "small hit design 1" based on the second special design lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state, in the special mini design display area A1 and the special design 2 fourth design display area A3, " A stop symbol corresponding to the "hit symbol" is stop-displayed.

On the other hand, when the first special symbol lottery is lost (in the case of "loss"), the stop symbol corresponding to the "loss symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device. In particular, when the first special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state is lost, the stop symbol corresponding to the "missing symbol" is displayed in the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 and the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area A2. Along with the stop display, the stop symbol corresponding to the "missing symbol" is also stop displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6. On the other hand, when the first special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state is lost, in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 and the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area A2, the stop symbol corresponding to the "lost symbol" Stop is displayed.
Here, the "missing pattern" stopped and displayed in the special-figure mini-symbol display area A1 and the special-figure 1 fourth design display area A2 is, for example, stop-displayed in the three special-figure display areas of the special-figure mini-symbol display area A1. The number (identification information) indicated by the special figure mini effect symbol a1 stopped and displayed in at least one special figure display area, such as "1, 6, 9", is another special figure The combination is different from the number (identification information) indicated by the special mini effect symbol a1 stopped and displayed in the display area, and the special figure 1 fourth effect symbol a2 stopped and displayed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area A2 A display mode that indicates "x" is used.
In addition, the "missing symbols" stopped and displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6 are, for example, three main effect symbols a6 stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas, such as "1, 6, 9". A display in which the number (identification information) indicated by the main effect symbol a6 stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area is combined differently from the number (identification information) indicated by the main effect symbol a6 stopped and displayed in the other effect symbol display areas. mode.

When "big win pattern 1" or "big win pattern 2" is won, a big win game state is generated. In the jackpot game state, the special electric accessory 55a is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the entry of the game ball into the jackpot 55 becomes possible (easy).
In this embodiment, it is more advantageous for the player to win the "big win" based on the first special symbol lottery than to win the "big win" based on the second special symbol lottery. . That is, during the occurrence of the jackpot game state, a predetermined number of round games are executed. Then, the number of round games is larger in the case of winning the "jackpot pattern 1" than in the case of winning the "jackpot pattern 2". Concretely, when "jackpot symbol 1" is won, the number of round games is set to 10 [times]. On the other hand, when "jackpot symbol 2" is won, the number of round games is set to 7 [times].
In addition, in this embodiment, since the number of round games is larger in the case of winning the "jackpot pattern 1" than in the case of winning the "jackpot pattern 2", the "jackpot" is decided based on the second special pattern lottery. Winning a "jackpot" based on the first special symbol lottery is more advantageous to the player than winning the . However, if you win the "jackpot pattern 1" than if you win the "jackpot pattern 2", the number of times of time reduction (especially the number of times of time reduction and the number of times of time reduction) set at the end of the jackpot game state Due to the large number of symbols, the player may be more advantageous to win the ``jackpot'' based on the first special symbol lottery than to win the ``jackpot'' based on the second special symbol lottery. I do not care. Alternatively, if the "jackpot pattern 2" is won, the bonus effect is not executed during the occurrence of the jackpot game state, and if the "jackpot pattern 1" is won, the bonus effect is given during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. By being executed, it is more advantageous for the player to win the "big win" based on the first special symbol lottery than to win the "big win" based on the second special symbol lottery. I don't mind.
Further, when "jackpot pattern 1" or "jackpot pattern 2" is won, the maximum opening time of the special electric accessory 55a in each round game is a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 29.0 [s] ).
Then, each round game is (1) that the longest opening time has passed since the special electric accessory 55a was opened, and (2) the game to the big winning opening 55 during the execution of the round game The game ends when one of the following conditions is met: the number of balls entering reaches a predetermined upper limit (10 [balls] in this embodiment).

At the end of the jackpot game state, a predetermined number of times of time saving (first number of times of saving time, second number of times of saving time, third number of times of saving time) is set. Then, in response to the end of the jackpot game state, time saving control is started according to the number of times of time saving that has been set. Thereby, the time saving state is started according to the end of the jackpot game state.
In this embodiment, when the time-saving state is occurring than during the normal state, the probability that the "long open pattern" is selected when the "normal pattern" is won by the normal symbol lottery is higher. This is advantageous for players. Concretely, when "normal pattern hit" is won based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, "short opening pattern" is selected and set with a probability of 1/1. On the other hand, when "normal pattern winning" is won based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state, the "long opening pattern" is selected and set with a probability of 656/65536.

In the present embodiment, the conditions for ending time saving control (hereinafter referred to as “time saving end conditions”) are “time saving end condition 1”, “time saving end condition 2”, “time saving end condition 3”, and “time saving end Condition 4” is stipulated.
"Time-saving end condition 1" is a condition based on the first special symbol lottery (special figure hit-loss determination based on special figure 1 game information). In other words, the time saving end condition 1 is a condition regarding the number of first special symbol games to be described later. That is, the time-saving end condition 1 is a condition based on the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol. In this embodiment, when the number of fluctuations in the time saving special figure 1 reaches the first time saving number set at the end of the big hit game state, the time saving end condition 1 is established.
"Special figure 1 variation number of times during time saving" is the number of times of variation display of the first special symbol executed during time saving control.
When the time saving end condition 1 is established, the time saving control is ended at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol which triggered the establishment of the time saving end condition 1.例文帳に追加
Specifically, the main control board 200 is configured with a first time-saving counter that counts the number of times of special figure 1 variation during time-saving. At the end of the jackpot game state, the CPU 210 sets the first time-saving number according to the combination of the game state (normal state or time-saving state) and the winning type (winning symbol type) as the value of the first time-saving counter. do. Also, every time the variable display of the first special symbol ends, "1" is subtracted from the value of the first time saving counter. And according to having subtracted the value of the 1st time saving counter to "0", the time saving end condition 1 is satisfied, and time saving control is stopped.
In addition, when the number of special figure per determination (start determination) based on special figure 1 game information executed during time saving control reaches the first time saving number set at the end of the jackpot game state, time saving end condition A configuration in which 1 is established may be adopted. In the case of such a configuration, the time saving control is ended at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol that triggered the establishment of the time saving end condition 1. Alternatively, when the number of stop displays of the first special symbols executed during the time saving control reaches the first time saving number of times set at the end of the jackpot game state, the time saving end condition 1 may be established. do not have. In the case of such a configuration, the time saving control is ended at the end of the stop display of the first special symbol that triggered the establishment of the time saving end condition 1.

"Time saving end condition 2" is a condition based on the second special symbol lottery (special symbol hit-loss determination based on special figure 2 game information). In other words, the time saving end condition 2 is a condition regarding the number of second special symbol games to be described later. That is, the time-saving end condition 2 is a condition based on the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol. In this embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 in time saving reaches the second time saving number of times set at the end of the big hit game state, the time saving end condition 2 is established.
"Special figure 2 fluctuation number of times during time saving" is the number of times of fluctuation display of the second special symbol executed during time saving control.
When the time saving end condition 2 is established, the time saving control is ended at the end of the variable display of the second special symbol which triggered the establishment of the time saving end condition 2.例文帳に追加
Specifically, the main control board 200 is configured with a second time-saving counter that counts the number of times of time-saving special figure 2 fluctuations. At the end of the jackpot game state, the CPU 210 sets the second time-saving number according to the combination of the game state (normal state or time-saving state) and the winning type (winning symbol type) as the value of the second time-saving counter. do. In addition, every time the variable display of the second special symbol ends, "1" is subtracted from the value of the second time saving counter. And according to the value of the 2nd time saving counter having been subtracted to "0", the time saving end condition 2 is satisfied and the time saving control is stopped.
In addition, when the number of times of special figure hit determination (start determination) based on special figure 2 game information executed during time saving control reaches the second time saving number of times set at the end of the big hit game state, time saving end condition 2 may be established. In the case of such a configuration, the time saving control is ended at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol that triggered the establishment of the time saving end condition 2 . Alternatively, when the number of times of stop display of the second special symbol executed during the time saving control reaches the second time saving number of times set at the end of the big hit game state, the time saving end condition 2 may be established. do not have. In the case of such a configuration, the time saving control is ended at the end of the stop display of the second special symbol that triggered the establishment of the time saving end condition 2 .

"Time saving end condition 3" is a condition based on the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern per determination). In other words, the time saving end condition 3 is a condition regarding the number of normal symbol games to be described later. That is, the time saving end condition 3 is a condition based on the number of times of variable display of normal symbols. In this embodiment, when the number of times of time saving middle-normal figure fluctuation reaches the third time saving number of times set at the end of the big hit game state, time saving end condition 3 is established.
"Time saving middle normal figure fluctuation frequency" has become the number of times of fluctuation display of the normal design which is executed during time saving control.
When the time saving end condition 3 is established, the time saving control is ended at the end of the variable display of the normal symbol which triggered the establishment of the time saving end condition 3.
Specifically, the main control board 200 is configured with a third time-saving counter that counts the number of time-saving medium-normal diagram variations. At the end of the jackpot game state, the CPU 210 sets the third time-saving number according to the combination of the game state (normal state or time-saving state) and the winning type (winning symbol type) as the value of the third time-saving counter. do. Also, every time the variable display of normal symbols is completed, "1" is subtracted from the value of the third time saving counter. And according to having subtracted the value of the 3rd time saving counter to "0", the time saving end condition 3 is satisfied, and time saving control is stopped.
It should be noted that, when the number of normal figure hit-loss determination (start determination) executed during time saving control reaches the third time saving number set at the end of the jackpot game state, the time saving end condition 3 is established. I do not care. In the case of such a configuration, the time saving control is ended at the start of the variable display of the normal symbols that triggered the establishment of the time saving end condition 3 . Alternatively, when the number of times of stop display of normal symbols executed during the time saving control reaches the third number of time saving times set at the end of the jackpot game state, the time saving end condition 3 may be established. In the case of such a configuration, the time saving control is ended at the end of the stop display of the normal symbol that triggered the establishment of the time saving end condition 3 .

"Time-saving end condition 4" is a condition based on winning the "jackpot" (jackpot game state). In this embodiment, when the "jackpot" is won (when the jackpot game state is generated), the time-saving end condition 4 is established.
When the time-saving end condition 4 is established, the time-saving control is ended at the end of the stop display of the "big hit pattern".
In addition, in this embodiment, "time saving end condition 1", "time saving end condition 2", "time saving end condition 3" and "time saving end condition 4" are defined as time saving end conditions. However, the "time saving end condition 5" may be included as the time saving end condition. The "time saving end condition 5" is a condition based on winning the "minor win" (minor win gaming state). That is, when the "small hit" is won (when the small win game state is generated), the time saving end condition 5 is established. At this time, if the time-saving end condition 5 is met, at the start of the special symbol lottery (start judgment) that won the "small hit", at the start of the special symbol lottery that won the "small hit" ( At the start of the stop display of the special symbol based on the start determination), at the start of the small winning game state (or small winning game), and at the end of the small winning game state (or small winning game) At that timing, the time saving control may be terminated.
In addition, in this embodiment, when the number of times of time saving medium figure fluctuation reaches the third time saving number of times set at the end of the big hit game state, the time saving end condition 3 is established. That is, the time saving control is terminated on the condition that the number of times of variable display of normal symbols executed during the time saving control reaches the third time saving number of times. However, when the number of time-saving medium figure winning times reaches the third time-saving number of times set at the end of the big hit game state, the time-saving end condition 3 may be established. "Time-saving middle-normal figure winning times" is the number of winning times of "normal figure per" based on the normal symbol lottery executed during time-saving control. That is, the time saving control may be terminated on the condition that the number of winning times of "normal pattern win" based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the time saving control reaches the third time saving number of times.

When the jackpot game state is generated, at the end of the jackpot game state, the number of times of time reduction (first number of times of time reduction, second number of times of time reduction, third number of times of time reduction) is set, and according to the end of the jackpot game state , the time saving state is started. In particular, in the present embodiment, as the first number of times of time saving, a small number of times is defined as compared to each of the second number of times of time saving and the third number of times of time saving. Further, as the second number of times of time saving, a larger number of times than the third number of times of time saving is specified.
That is, as shown in FIG. 6(a), when "big hit pattern 1" is won and the game state at the time of execution of start determination (special figure hit determination) is a normal state, at the end of the big hit game state , 5 [times] is set as the first number of times of time saving, 100 [times] is set as the second number of times of time saving, and 50 [times] is set as the third number of times of time saving. And, time saving control is started according to the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, if the "jackpot pattern 1" is elected and the game state at the time of execution of the start determination (special figure hit determination) is a time saving state, at the end of the jackpot game state, as the first time saving number of times, 5 [times ] is set, 400 [times] is set as the second number of times of time saving, and 200 [times] is set as the third number of times of time saving. And, time saving control is started according to the end of the jackpot game state.
Thus, in the present embodiment, it is executed during the occurrence of the time-saving state than when the "jackpot symbol 1" is elected based on the first special symbol lottery (start determination) executed during the occurrence of the normal state. If you win the "jackpot pattern 1" based on the first special pattern lottery (start determination), the second time saving number and the third time saving number set at the end of the big hit game state are increased, and the player be advantageous to In addition, regarding the first time-saving number of times set at the end of the jackpot game state, when the "jackpot pattern 1" is elected based on the first special pattern lottery (start determination) executed during the occurrence of the normal state, It is the same as the case of winning the "jackpot symbol 1" based on the first special symbol lottery (start determination) executed during the occurrence of the time saving state.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6(b), when "big hit pattern 2" is won and the game state at the time of execution of start determination (special figure hit determination) is a normal state, at the end of the big hit game state , 5 [times] is set as the first number of times of time saving, 400 [times] is set as the second number of times of time saving, and 200 [times] is set as the third number of times of time saving. And, time saving control is started according to the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, if the "jackpot pattern 2" is elected and the game state at the time of execution of the start determination (special figure hit determination) is a time saving state, at the end of the jackpot game state, as the first time saving number of times, 5 [times ] is set, 400 [times] is set as the second number of times of time saving, and 200 [times] is set as the third number of times of time saving. And, time saving control is started according to the end of the jackpot game state.

When "small winning symbol 1" is won, a small winning game state is generated. In the small winning game state, the special electric accessory 55a is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the entry of the game ball into the big winning opening 55 becomes possible (easy).
During the occurrence of the small winning game state, a predetermined number of small winning games are executed. When "small winning symbol 1" is won, the number of small winning games is set to 1 [time].
Further, when the "small winning pattern 1" is won, the maximum opening time of the special electric role product 55a in each small winning game is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment). be.
Then, each small winning game is (1) that the longest opening time has passed since the special electric accessory 55a was opened, and (2) to the big winning opening 55 during the execution of the small winning game. The number of game balls entered reaches a predetermined upper limit number (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]).
Further, in each small winning game, the sorting means is displaced from the non-V passing state to the V passing state. At this time, in the small winning game of each time, the sorting means is set to the non-V area in such a manner that the game ball entering the big winning opening 55 during the execution of the small winning game can easily (possibly) pass through the V area. It is displaced from the pass state to the V pass state. As a result, when the "small winning pattern 1" is won, it becomes easy (possible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small winning game state. It should be noted that, as the type of the "small winning pattern", a type may be defined that makes it difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V area while the small winning game state is occurring.

When passage of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small winning game state (when passage of the V area by the game ball entering the big winning opening 55 is detected during execution of the small winning game) , a big hit game state is generated in response to the end of the small hit game state.
At this time, when "small winning pattern 1" is won and passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during occurrence of the small winning game state, the number of round games is set to 6 [times]. . As a result, 7 [times] rounds are executed with the small winning game as the first round game.
In addition, when the "small winning pattern 1" is won and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected while the small winning game state is occurring, the maximum opening of the special electric accessory 55a in each round game. Time is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment).
Then, each round game is (1) that the longest opening time has passed since the special electric accessory 55a was opened, and (2) the game to the big winning opening 55 during the execution of the round game The game ends when one of the following conditions is met: the number of balls entering reaches a predetermined upper limit (10 [balls] in this embodiment).
On the other hand, if the passing of the game ball through the V area is not detected while the small winning game state is occurring ), the jackpot gaming state is not generated.

As shown in FIG. 6 (c), "small hit pattern 1" is won, and passage of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit game state, and start determination (special figure hit determination ) is the normal state, at the end of the jackpot game state, 5 [times] is set as the first number of time reductions, 400 [times] is set as the second number of time reductions, and the second 200 [times] is set as the number of times of 3 o'clock reduction. And, time saving control is started according to the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, "small hit pattern 1" is won, and the passage of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit game state, and the game state at the time of execution of the start determination (special hit determination) In the case of the time saving state, at the end of the jackpot game state, 5 [times] is set as the first time saving number of times, 400 [times] is set as the second time saving number of times, and 200 [times] is set as the third time saving number of times. ] is set. And, time saving control is started according to the end of the jackpot game state.

(Regarding game progress)
Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the transition of game states.
In the following description, the game based on the first special symbol lottery is referred to as "first special symbol game". That is, the first special symbol game is a game based on the starting determination based on the special figure 1 game information. Specifically, the first special symbol game is a game related to the variable display/stop display of the first special symbol. Also, the game based on the second special symbol lottery is referred to as "second special symbol game". That is, the second special symbol game is a game based on the starting determination based on the special figure 2 game information. Specifically, the second special symbol game is a game related to the variable display/stop display of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the game based on the normal symbol lottery is referred to as "normal symbol game". That is, the normal design game is a game based on the starting determination based on the normal pattern game information. Specifically, the normal symbol game is a game related to normal symbol fluctuation display/stop display.
In the pachinko machine 1, when a ``jackpot'' is won by a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery), a game ball can (easily) enter a big winning hole 55. is generated.
Further, when a "small win" is won by the second special symbol lottery, a small win game state is generated in which the game ball can enter (easy) the big winning hole 55.例文帳に追加Furthermore, when passage of the V area by the game ball entering the big winning hole 55 is detected while the small winning game state is occurring, the game ball entering the big winning hole 55 becomes possible (easily). A jackpot gaming state is generated.
Then, the player can win many prize balls by entering the game balls into the big winning hole 55.例文帳に追加
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the probability of generating a big win game state based on the second special symbol lottery is higher than the probability of generating a big win game state based on the first special symbol lottery. .
Specifically, in the first special symbol lottery, since "small win" is not set as the lottery result, the big win game state is generated only when "big win" is won. The probability of winning the "big hit" by the first special symbol lottery is 328/65536.
On the other hand, in the second special symbol lottery, since "big win" and "minor win" are set as the lottery results, when the "big win" is won, a big win gaming state is generated and the "minor win" occurs. A big win game state is generated when a game ball is detected to pass through the V area during the occurrence of the small win game state. In particular, the probability of winning the "big win" or "minor win" by the second special symbol lottery is 32768/65536 (50[%]).
Thus, in the second special symbol lottery, since the big win game state can be generated via the small win game state, the probability of the occurrence of the big win game state is lower than that of the first special symbol lottery. getting higher.
As a result, in the pachinko machine 1, obtaining the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery rather than obtaining the opportunity of the first special symbol lottery increases the possibility of causing a big win game state, and the player is encouraged. be advantageous.

In order to acquire the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery wins the ``normal pattern winning'', and the normal electric accessory 52a is in the open state during the occurrence of the normal symbol game state. Sometimes, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52 .
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, a "short release pattern" and a "long release pattern" are defined as the release patterns of the normal electric accessory 52a during the normal per game state. Then, when the "short open pattern" is selected, it becomes difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52 during the occurrence of the per normal game state. On the other hand, when the "long open pattern" is selected, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 during the occurrence of the per normal game state.
In particular, during the occurrence of the normal state, the "short open pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1 when the "normal pattern hit" is won by the normal pattern lottery. As a result, when the normal pattern lottery wins the "normal pattern hit" during the normal state, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second start port 52 with a probability of 1/1 (second It becomes difficult to acquire the opportunity of the special design lottery).
On the other hand, during the time-saving state, when the normal pattern lottery wins the "normal pattern", the "long open pattern" is selected with a probability of 656/65536. As a result, during the occurrence of the time-saving state, if the normal pattern lottery wins the "normal pattern", the probability of 656/65536 is 656/65536. It becomes easy to acquire the opportunity of the special design lottery).

As described above, during the occurrence of the normal state, the "short open pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1 when the "normal pattern win" is won by the normal symbol lottery. As a result, it becomes virtually impossible to obtain the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery even if the player wins the "general symbol lottery" by the normal symbol lottery. Therefore, the player proceeds with the game with the aim of winning the "jackpot" by the first special symbol lottery in order to shift the game state to the time saving state. In other words, the game ball is launched into the left path with the aim of entering the game ball into the first starting hole 51 . As a result, the game progresses mainly with the first special symbol game during the occurrence of the normal state. Then, when "big hit" is won by the first special symbol lottery, the game state shifts to the time saving state after the big win game state is finished.
On the other hand, during the time-saving state, when the normal pattern lottery wins the "normal pattern", the "long open pattern" is selected with a probability of 656/65536. This makes it easy to obtain the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery with a probability of 656/65536 when winning the "normal symbol lottery" by the normal symbol lottery. Therefore, the player progresses the game with the aim of winning the "long release pattern" based on the normal symbol lottery in order to acquire the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery. In other words, the game ball is launched toward the right path with the aim of passing the starting gate 41 by the game ball. Thereby, the game is progressed mainly by the normal symbol game during the occurrence of the time saving state. Then, if the "long open pattern" is won based on the normal symbol lottery and the "small hit" or "big hit" is won by the second special symbol lottery, the game state is changed after the big win game state is finished. Move to short-time state. On the other hand, if the variable display of the first special symbol of the first number of time reductions is executed without winning the "small hit" or "big hit" by the second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol of the second number of time reductions When the variable display is performed, or when the variable display of the normal symbols for the third number of time reduction times is performed, the game state shifts to the normal state.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the RAM clearing initialization process (step S1-30), which will be described later, is executed, the normal state occurs. During the normal state, if the normal pattern lottery wins the "normal pattern", the "short open pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1 (the probability that the "long open pattern" is selected is , becomes 0%).
As shown in FIG. 7, when "jackpot pattern 1" is won on the basis of the first special pattern lottery executed while the normal state is occurring, the time saving state is generated in accordance with the end of the jackpot game state. be.
When "normal pattern hit" is won based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state, the "long open pattern" is selected with a probability of 656/65536. As a result, when winning the "normal pattern lottery" based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state, the probability of 656/65536 is 656/65536, and the second start is generated during the normal pattern game state. It becomes easy to enter the game ball into the mouth 52.例文帳に追加Also, in the second special symbol lottery, a "big hit" or "small hit" is won with a probability of 32768/65536.
When a ``jackpot pattern 2'' is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time-saving state, the time-saving state is generated upon termination of the big-win game state. On the other hand, the ``small hit pattern 1'' is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state, and the passing of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of the small win game state. In this case, a time saving state is generated in response to the end of the jackpot game state. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the time saving state, if the variable display of the first special symbol of the first number of times of time saving is executed without the occurrence of the jackpot game state, the variable display of the second special symbol of the second number of times of time saving is performed. When executed, or when the variable display of normal symbols for the third number of times of time saving is executed, the normal state is caused accordingly.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the game progresses mainly with the first special symbol game during the occurrence of the normal state. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the time saving state, the game is progressed mainly by the normal symbol game.
As a result, it is possible to change the type of symbols for which the lottery is mainly executed (variation display/stop display is executed) according to the game state, and it is possible to improve the game playability.

(Significance of the first number of reduced working hours)
Next, the significance of the first number of time reductions set in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing time-saving end conditions in a conventional gaming machine.
In the pachinko machine 1, in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning a "big win" or "minor win" is 32768/65536 (50[%]), and the probability of "losing" is 32768/65536 (50[%]). %]). That is, in the second special symbol lottery, it is not configured to win the "big win" or "minor win" with a probability of 1/1.
As a result, even if the ``long open pattern'' is won by the normal symbol lottery during the occurrence of the time saving state, the occurrence of the big win game state is not determined, and the ``big win'' or ``small win'' is won by the second special symbol lottery. ”, the number of times of reduced working hours (2nd number of reduced hours, 3rd number of reduced hours) will continue to decrease.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, the first special symbol lottery (start determination) performed during the normal state is more likely to be executed during the time-saving state than when the "jackpot symbol 1" is won. In the case of winning the ``jackpot pattern 1'' based on 1 special pattern lottery (start determination), the second and third time reduction times set at the end of the jackpot game state increase, which is advantageous to the player. becomes.
As a result, it is more advantageous for the player to win the "jackpot" by the first special symbol lottery during the occurrence of the time-saving state than to win the "big win" by the first special symbol lottery during the occurrence of the normal state. Become.
Here, as shown in FIG. 46, in the conventional gaming machine, as the time saving end condition 1, a condition based on the total number of fluctuations in the special figure during time saving is defined, and as the time saving end condition 2, the special figure 2 fluctuation number in the time saving A condition based on is defined, and as the time saving end condition 3, a condition based on the number of times of time saving middle-normal figure fluctuation is defined. "Total number of fluctuations in special symbols during time saving" is the number of times of fluctuation display of the first special symbol executed during time saving control, and the number of times of fluctuation display of the second special symbol executed during time saving control, and the total number of times It has become.
However, in the pachinko machine 1 premised on the configuration as described above, if the time-saving end condition of a conventional gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "conventional time-saving end condition") is applied, it becomes possible to practice an unintended capture method, There is a risk of unintended ball performance.

That is, in the conventional time-saving end conditions, the first time-saving counter that counts the total number of fluctuations in the time-saving special figure is configured, and at the end of the jackpot game state, the value of the first time-saving counter is the game state (normal state or time-saving state). , and the winning type (type of winning pattern), and the first number of times of time reduction is set according to the combination. Then, every time the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is completed, "1" is subtracted from the value of the first time saving counter, and the value of the first time saving counter is subtracted to "0". In response to this, the time saving end condition 1 is established, and the time saving control is stopped.
In addition, in the conventional time-saving end conditions, a second time-saving counter that counts the number of times of time-saving special figure 2 fluctuations is configured, and at the end of the big hit game state, the value of the second time-saving counter is the game state (normal state or time-saving state) And, the winning type (type of winning design), and the second number of times of time saving are set according to the combination. Then, every time the variable display of the second special symbol ends, "1" is subtracted from the value of the second time saving counter, and according to the value of the second time saving counter being subtracted to "0", the time saving ends. Condition 2 is satisfied, and the time saving control is stopped.
Furthermore, in the conventional time-saving end condition, a third time-saving counter that counts the number of time-saving medium-normal figure fluctuations is configured, and at the end of the jackpot game state, the value of the third time-saving counter is changed to the game state (normal state or time-saving state). , and the winning type (type of winning pattern), and the third time-saving number of times is set according to the combination. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol ends, "1" is subtracted from the value of the third time saving counter, and in response to the fact that the value of the third time saving counter is subtracted to "0", time saving end condition 3 is established, and the time saving control is stopped.
In particular, as shown in FIG. 46, in the conventional time saving end condition, as the first number of times of time saving, a large number of times is defined as compared with each of the second number of times of time saving and the third number of times of time saving. That is, in order to ensure the provision of a time saving state during the period in which the second time saving number is digested, the first Shortened times are stipulated. For example, if "jackpot pattern 1" is elected and the game state at the time of execution of the start determination (special figure hit determination) is normal, at the end of the jackpot game state, the first time saving number of times, 105 [times ] is set, 100 [times] is set as the second number of times of time saving, and 50 [times] is set as the third number of times of time saving.

As a result, when the conventional time-saving end condition is applied in the pachinko machine 1, the game ball is usually launched to the right path during the occurrence of the time-saving state, and the game proceeds mainly with the normal symbol game, Just before the number of time-saving middle-normal figure fluctuations reaches the third time-saving number of times (for example, when the number of time-saving middle-normal figure fluctuations reaches 49 [times]), the path for launching the game ball is changed from the right path to the left side path. , it is possible to practice an unintended capture method of switching from the progress of the game mainly based on the normal symbol game to the progress of the game mainly based on the first special symbol game. That is, just before the number of time-saving middle-normal figure fluctuations reaches the third time-saving number of times, the normal capture method aiming to win the "big hit" or "small hit" by the second special symbol lottery is given up, and the time-saving state occurs. Winning the ``jackpot pattern 1'' based on the first special pattern lottery during the game is more advantageous to the player than winning the ``jackpot pattern 1'' based on the first special pattern lottery after shifting to the normal state. It is possible to practice an unintended capture method aiming to acquire the number of times of working hours. And if such an unintended capture method is put into practice, there is a risk that the intended ball-balling performance will be exceeded.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 6, without applying the conventional time-saving end condition, as the time-saving end condition 1, the condition based on the number of times of time-saving special figure 1 fluctuation is defined, and as the time-saving end condition 2, The conditions based on the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 in time saving are defined, and the conditions based on the number of fluctuations in the normal figure in time saving are defined as the time saving end condition 3. In particular, as the first number of times of time saving, a small number of times is defined as compared with each of the second number of times of time saving and the third number of times of time saving.
As a result, normally, during the occurrence of the time saving state, the game ball is launched to the right path, and the game progresses mainly with the normal pattern game, just before the time saving middle normal figure fluctuation number reaches the third time saving number (For example, when the number of time-saving middle-normal figure fluctuations reaches 49 [times]), the path for launching the game ball is changed from the right path to the left path, and from the progress of the game mainly based on the normal symbol game, the second Even if an unintended capture method is practiced to switch to the progress of the game mainly with 1 special symbol game, the time saving state is ended by the number of times of time saving medium special figure 1 fluctuation reaching the first number of times of time saving at an early timing. becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the practice of an unintended capture method, and as a result, it is possible to achieve the intended ball-balling performance.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the first number of times of reduced hours is defined such that "the first number of reduced hours = the upper limit of the number of special figures 1 reserved + '1'". Thereby, the special figure 1 game information stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area is prioritized over the special figure 2 game information stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area, and the start determination is executed. Even if it is configured to be, while preventing the time-saving state from being terminated based on the digestion of the number of special 1 reservations, the time-saving state is immediately terminated when an unintended capture method is practiced. It is possible to
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1, the condition based on the number of times of special figure total variation during time saving is not stipulated as the time saving end condition. By this, compared with the case where the condition based on the special figure total variation number of times during time saving is defined as the time saving end condition, it is possible to suppress an increase in the control burden for time saving control.

(Regarding control commands)
Next, control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 and control commands transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 will be described.
The main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, the communication between the main control board 200 and the production control board 300 is performed only in one direction from the main control board 200 to the production control board 300, and the communication from the production control board 300 to the main control board 200 is Not done.
Each control command transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 consists of 1-byte upper data indicating the type of control command and 1-byte lower data indicating the content of the control command. there is
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command composed of upper data and lower data to the effect control board 300 by serial communication. When the effect control board 300 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 include a special figure design specification command, a special figure variation mode specification command, a special figure variation pattern specification command, and a special figure stop specification command. , General pattern type specification command, General pattern variation pattern specification command, General pattern stop specification command, Game state specification command, Special figure reservation number specification command, General figure reservation number specification command, Opening specification command, Round start specification command, Round An end designation command, an ending designation command, a V prize designation command, a first prefetch designation command, a second prefetch designation command, a third prefetch designation command, an error designation command, a demonstration designation command, a setting value designation command, and the like are set.
The special symbol type specification command designates the type of the special symbol stop symbol (any one of "lost symbol", "big hit symbol 1", "big hit symbol 2" and "small hit symbol 1"). is a command. The special symbol type specification command is transmitted at the start of the variable display of the special symbols. Here, the special figure symbol type specifying command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information).

The special figure variation mode specification command is a command that specifies the type (variation mode number) of the variation mode of the special symbol. Special figure fluctuation mode specification command specifies the fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation mode number by specifying the fluctuation mode number. The special figure variation mode specification command designates the variation time of the first half period (form of the first half of the variation presentation) of the variation display (variation presentation) of the special symbol.
In the present embodiment, m (plural) types are set as the types of the variation mode of the special symbol, each of which is associated with a different variation time. Then, the special figure variation mode specification command specifies one ("variation mode m") of the m types of variation mode types (variation mode numbers).
The special figure variation pattern specification command is a command that specifies the type (variation pattern number) of the variation pattern of the special symbol. Special figure variation pattern specification command specifies the variation time associated with the variation pattern number by specifying the variation pattern number. The special figure variation pattern designation command designates the variation time of the latter half period (mode of the latter half period of the variation performance) of the variation display (variation performance) of the special symbol.
In the present embodiment, n (plural) types are set as the types of variation patterns of the special symbols, which are associated with different variation times. Then, the special figure variation pattern specification command specifies one of n types of variation pattern types (variation pattern number) ("variation pattern n").
The special figure variation mode specification command and the special figure variation pattern specification command are transmitted at the start of the special symbol variation display.

The special figure stop designation command is a command that designates the stop display of the special symbols. The special figure stop specification command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol stop display. Here, the special figure stop specification command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information).
The general pattern type specification command is a command that specifies the type of the stop pattern of the normal pattern ("per normal pattern 1" or "per normal pattern 2"). The general pattern type designation command is normally transmitted at the start of the fluctuation display in the design.
Normal figure fluctuation pattern designation command is a command which designates the classification (variation pattern number) of the fluctuation pattern in the normal design. Ordinary figure fluctuation pattern specification command specifies the fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation pattern number by specifying the fluctuation pattern number.
Normal figure stop designation command is a command which designates the stop display in the normal design. The general pattern stop designation command is transmitted at the start of the normal pattern stop display.
The game state designation command is a command for designating a game state (game state offset value). Here, the "game state offset value" is information specifying the game state. In this embodiment, as the gaming state offset value, a numerical value corresponding to each combination of the value of the time saving control flag, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag, and the value of the rotation counter after the big hit is set. The game state designation command designates one game state offset value. The game state designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when changing the special game phase, which will be described later, or the like.

Special figure reservation number specification command is a command to specify the number of reservations of special symbols. In this embodiment, the special figure reservation number designation command is that the number of reservations (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) is increased by "1", the number of reservations (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number ) has decreased by “1”, the number of reservations (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) etc. are specified.
Here, the "special figure 1 pending number" refers to the number of notice display (fluctuation display and stop display) of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display device is reserved. In other words, the special figure 1 pending number refers to the number of special figure 1 game information that the starting determination is pending. In addition, the "special figure 2 pending number" refers to the number of notice display (fluctuation display and stop display) of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 display device is reserved. In other words, the special figure 2 pending number refers to the number of special figure 2 game information that the starting determination is pending.
The special figure pending number specification command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when the game information is stored, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, and the like. Here, the special figure pending number specification command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information).
Ordinary figure reservation number specification command is a command that normally specifies the number of reservations in the design. In this embodiment, the special figure reservation number designation command specifies that the number of general figure reservations has increased by "1", that the number of general figure reservations has decreased by "1", the number of general figure reservations, and the like.
Here, the "normal number of pending" refers to the number of times the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the normal symbol in the normal display device is suspended. In other words, the normal pattern pending number refers to the number of normal pattern game information that the normal pattern hit and drop determination is suspended.
Normal figure reservation number designation command is transmitted at the time of power-on, at the time of storage of game information, at the time of starting variable display of normal symbols, and the like.

The opening designation command is a command that designates the start of the opening period (the start of the small winning game state or the big winning game state). The opening designation command is the type of the small winning game state or the big winning game state to start (type of stop pattern (specifically, any one of "small winning design 1", "big winning design 1" and "big winning design 2"). type))). The opening designation command is transmitted at the start of the opening period (at the start of the small winning game state or the big winning game state).
The round start designation command is a command for designating the start of a round (small winning game or round game). The round start designation command is transmitted at the start of the round (small winning game or round game).
The round end designation command is a command for designating the end of the round (small winning game or round game). The round end designation command is transmitted at the end of the round (small winning game or round game).
The ending designation command is a command that designates the start of the ending period. The ending specifying command is sent at the beginning of the ending period.
The V winning designation command is a command for designating detection of passage of the game ball through the V area. The V winning designation command is transmitted when the passing of the game ball through the V area is detected.

The first look-ahead designation command is a command that designates the type of stop design of the special design (one of the types of "lost design", "big hit design 1", "big hit design 2" and "small hit design 1") is. Here, the first prefetch designation command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information).
The second look-ahead designation command is a command that designates the contents of the special symbol variation mode. Specifically, the second look-ahead designation command indicates that the type of variation mode is undefined ("undefined value"), or one of m types of variation modes (variation mode number) ("variation mode m" ). The second prefetch designation command is transmitted when game information is stored.
The third look-ahead designation command is a command that designates the contents of the variation pattern of the special symbol. Specifically, the third prefetch designation command is that the type of variation pattern is undefined ("undefined value"), or one of n types of variation patterns (variation pattern number) ("variation pattern n" ). The third prefetch designation command is transmitted when game information is stored.

The error designation command is a command that designates the occurrence of various errors. In this embodiment, the error designation command designates occurrence of vibration error, magnetic error, radio wave error, or right-handed hitting error. The error designation command is sent when the occurrence of various errors is detected.
The demonstration designation command is a command that designates the start of the customer waiting state. The demonstration designation command is sent at the start of the customer waiting state.
The setting value designation command is a command for designating the setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 . The setting value designation command is transmitted when the RAM is cleared, when the power is restored after the power is turned on, when the setting change state ends, and when the setting confirmation state ends.

The main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 is bidirectional. Each control command transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 consists of 1-byte data.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command to the payout control board 400 by serial communication. In the payout control board 400, when a control command is received from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing. Also, the payout control board 400 transmits a control command to the main control board 200 by serial communication. In the main control board 200, when a control command is received from the payout control board 400, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, as a control command transmitted from the main control board 200 to the payout control board 400, a command for designating the number of winning balls and the like are set.
The prize number designation command is a command for designating the number of prize balls to be paid out. In this embodiment, the number-of-prizing-balls designation command designates the payout of n (n=1 to 15) prize balls. The prize ball number designation command is transmitted when the payout control board 400 executes the prize ball payout operation.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200 include the occurrence/cancellation of an error during payout, the occurrence/cancellation of a full tank error, the occurrence/cancellation of a jammed ball error, and the like. A control command specifying each is set. Each control command is sent upon detection of occurrence/release of various errors.

(Processing executed by main control board 200)
Next, processing executed by the main control board 200 will be described.
First, the functions of the hardware configured on the main control board 200 will be described.
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the random number generation circuit 203 starts the hardware random number update process.
In the hardware random number update process, each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202 (every 0.083 [μs] in this embodiment), the values of the first to third loop counters are changed within a predetermined range. (within the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment) is updated by "1".
Further, in the hard random number update process, every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (every 2.666 [μs] in this embodiment), the value of the fourth loop counter falls within a predetermined range (this In the embodiment, it is updated by "1" in the range of 0 to 10006).
Then, the winning random number of the normal symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the second special symbol lottery, and the reach group random number are respectively updated by the hard random number updating process. The hardware random number update process is executed as a function of the random number generation circuit 203 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.

Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the transmission shift registers of the command output ports 1 and 2 transmit the control commands stored in the FIFO buffers to the performance control board 300 or the payout control board 400. Start control command transmission processing. The control command transmission process is executed as a function of the command output ports 1 and 2 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.

Next, game control processing executed by the CPU 210 of the main control board 200 based on the program (software) stored in the ROM 220 will be described.
(CPU initialization processing)
First, CPU initialization processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing CPU initialization processing.
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the CPU 210 starts CPU initialization processing shown in FIG. The CPU initialization process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the CPU initialization processing is processing based on the program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 .

When the CPU initialization process is started, first, the process moves to step S1-1.
In step S1-1, an initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-2. In the initial setting process, a startup program is read from the ROM 220, and settings necessary for executing various processes such as register settings are performed.
In the initial setting process, the RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208, and the detection signal from the inner frame open sensor 108 are read.

Specifically, the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the RAM clear switch 207 is read two times, and the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on based on the two read results. is occurring. Then, the determination result is stored as switch information for the RAM clear switch 207 . At this time, if it is determined that the ON state has occurred, a value (“1” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has occurred is stored as the switch information, and the ON state has occurred. If it is determined that the switch has not occurred, a value (“0” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has not occurred is saved as the switch information.

Also, the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the setting key switch 208 is read two [times], and based on the reading result of the two [times], the ON state is generated for the setting key switch 208. determine whether or not Then, the determination result is saved as switch information of the setting key switch 208 . At this time, if it is determined that the ON state has occurred, a value (“1” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has occurred is stored as the switch information, and the ON state has occurred. If it is determined that the switch has not occurred, a value (“0” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has not occurred is saved as the switch information.

Furthermore, the value set in the receiving storage area corresponding to the inner frame open sensor 108 is read 2 [times], and based on the result of reading 2 [times], the inner frame open sensor 108 is turned on. is occurring. When it is determined that the ON state has not occurred, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value (“0” in this embodiment) indicating that the ON state has not occurred. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state has occurred, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is not rewritten.

In step S1-2, wait processing time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-3. In the wait processing time setting process, a predetermined wait processing time (3.1 [s] in this embodiment) is set in the timer counter. As a result, measurement of the set wait processing time by the timer counter is started.
In step S1-3, it is determined whether or not the wait processing time set in step S1-2 has passed. If it is determined that the wait processing time has passed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-4, If it is determined that the wait processing time has not elapsed (No), the processing of step S1-3 is repeated.
In step S1-4, RAM access permission processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-5. In the RAM access permission process, necessary processes are executed to permit access to the work area of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, in the RAM access permission process, a value corresponding to access permission is stored as a RAM protection value in the RAM access protection area of the RAM 230 . As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is permitted.

At step S1-5, a gaming machine state flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-6. In the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the gaming machine status flag is acquired.
Specifically, in the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is saved (loaded) in the D register.
At step S1-6, it is determined whether or not the backup valid flag is normal. If it is determined that it is not (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, when the value (backup valid flag) stored in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230 is a predetermined valid value, it is determined that the backup valid flag is normal, and the value stored in the backup valid flag area is not a predetermined valid value, it is determined that the backup valid flag is not normal.

In step S1-7, checksum calculation processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-8. In the checksum calculation process, a checksum is calculated based on the backup information.
Specifically, in the checksum calculation process, first, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the use area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 among the backup information.
Next, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the non-use area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230 among the backup information.

In step S1-8, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S1-7 is normal, and if it is determined that the checksum is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-9, If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, "the checksum value of the used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the used area M1 stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230" and "step S1 The checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in -7 must match the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area." Judge that the checksum is normal.
On the other hand, "the checksum value of the used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the used area M1 stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230" and "step S1- The checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in step 7 matches the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area." If not, it is determined that the checksum is not normal.

In step S1-9, a clear target area setting process at power-on is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-10. In the power-on clear target area setting process, as a range to clear (initialize) the use area M1 of the RAM 230, areas other than the setting value area and the gaming machine state flag area (specifically, the checksum area, Backup valid flag area, error related area, normal game related area 1, normal game related area 2, and stack area) are set.
At step S1-10, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on. If it is determined that the ON state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-21.
Here, based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 saved in step S1-1, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on. At this time, if a value indicating that an ON state has occurred is stored as switch information, it is determined that an ON state has occurred, and a value indicating that an ON state has not occurred is stored. If so, it is determined that the ON state has not occurred.

In step S1-11, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-12, and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-14.
Here, based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register, it is determined whether or not the game ready state has occurred. At this time, if the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state has occurred. It is determined that no possible state has occurred.

In step S1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-13, and the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the condition is not established (No), the process proceeds to step S1-14.
The "setting confirmation condition" is that a game ready state has occurred, the RAM clear switch 207 has not been turned on, the setting key switch 208 has been turned on, and This is established when the frame open sensor 108 is in the ON state.
Here, in step S1-1, if the inner frame open sensor 108 is not turned on, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value indicating that it is not turned on. As a result, when both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 are in the on state, a value indicating that the setting key switch 208 is in the on state is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. . On the other hand, if at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 is not turned on, a value indicating that the setting key switch 208 is not turned on is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. be done.
Therefore, in step 1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. At this time, if a value indicating that an ON state has occurred is stored as switch information, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, and a value indicating that an ON state has not occurred is stored. If so, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied.

In step S1-13, a setting confirmation state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the setting confirmation state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting value confirmation state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-14, a process for setting an area to be cleared upon power return is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-15. In the clear target area setting process at the time of power return, as the range to clear (initialize) the use area M1 of the RAM 230, the set value area, the gaming machine state flag area, the normal game related area 2, and other areas excluding the stack area Areas (specifically, checksum area, backup valid flag area, error-related area, and normal game-related area 1) are set.

In step S1-15, an initialization process at the time of power return is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-16. In the power recovery initialization process, the range set in step S1-14 is cleared (initialized) in the use area M1 of the RAM 230. FIG.
In step S1-16, a subcommand transmission process at power return is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-17. In the power recovery subcommand transmission process, a subcommand designating recovery from power shutdown is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
In step S1-17, a payout command transmission process at power return is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the payout command transmission process at the time of power recovery, a payout command designating recovery from power shutdown is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

In step S1-18, a backup abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-19. In the backup abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the backup abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-19, a non-use area read/write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-20. In the non-use area read/write check process, the non-use area M2 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and a read/write check is performed.
In step S1-20, a process for setting an area to be cleared in the event of an abnormality is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-21. In the abnormality clear target area setting process, all areas (specifically, the set value area, the gaming machine status flag area, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, error-related area, normal game-related area 1, normal game-related area 2, and stack area).

In step S1-21, a used area read/write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-22. In the used area read/write check process, the range set in step S1-20 in the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and the read/write check is performed.
Specifically, in the used area read/write check process, of the used area M1 of the RAM 230, all areas (specifically, the set value area, gaming machine status flag area, checksum area, backup valid flag area, error related area, normal game-related area 1, normal game-related area 2, and stack area) are cleared (initialized).
Thereby, a predetermined initial value is set as the value of each counter for the special figure 1 display pattern counter, the special figure 2 display pattern counter, and the normal figure display pattern counter.

In step S1-22, it is determined whether or not the result of the read/write check performed in steps S1-19 and S1-21 is normal. If it is determined that the result of the read/write check is not normal (No), , the process proceeds to step S1-23, and when it is determined that the result of the read/write check is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-24.
In step S1-23, RAM abnormality setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the RAM abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the RAM abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-24, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the setting confirmation state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-25, and the setting is performed. If it is determined that the confirmation state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-26.
Here, based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred. At this time, if the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is determined that the setting confirmation state has occurred. Determine that no confirmation condition has occurred.
At step S1-25, a playable state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-26. In the playable state setting process, a value corresponding to the playable state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.

In step S1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied.If it is determined that the setting change condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-27, and the setting change condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the condition is not established (No), the process proceeds to step S1-28.
The "setting change condition" is that the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on, the setting key switch 208 is turned on, and the inner frame open sensor 108 is turned on. holds when
Here, as described above, when both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 are in the ON state, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 indicates that the ON state has occurred. Value is saved. On the other hand, if at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108 is not turned on, a value indicating that the setting key switch 208 is not turned on is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. be done.
Therefore, in step 1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. .
At this time, if both the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 store a value indicating that the ON state has occurred, the setting change condition is satisfied. I judge. On the other hand, if at least one of the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 stores a value indicating that the ON state has not occurred, the setting change condition is established. determine that it is not.

In step S1-27, a setting change state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the setting change state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting change state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
At step S1-28, a gaming machine state flag saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-29. In the gaming machine status flag saving process, the gaming machine status flag set in the D register is saved in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 .
At step S1-29, a RAM clear subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-30. In the RAM clear subcommand transmission process, a subcommand designating that the RAM clear has been executed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

At step S1-30, the RAM clear initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-31. In the RAM clear initialization process, the RAM 230 is initialized. In the RAM clear initialization process, the range set in step S1-9 in the use area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized).
Specifically, in the RAM clearing initialization process, other areas (specifically, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the Error-related area, normal game-related area 1, normal game-related area 2, and stack area) are cleared (initialized).
Thereby, a predetermined initial value is set as the value of each counter for the special figure 1 display pattern counter, the special figure 2 display pattern counter, and the normal figure display pattern counter.
In step S1-31, a payout command transmission process when RAM is cleared is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the payout command transmission process at the time of RAM clearing, a payout command specifying that the RAM clearing has been executed is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

In step S1-32, a subcommand setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-33. In the subcommand setting process, a power-on gaming machine state designation command designating the current gaming machine state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, in the sub-command setting process, a sub-command output request of the RAM 230 outputs a power-on gaming machine state specifying command that specifies the gaming machine state flag (gaming machine state) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 . Store in buffer.
In step S1-33, a subcommand group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-34. In the subcommand group setting process, the subcommand group is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230 .
Here, the sub-command group includes a sub-command specifying the power recovery phase, a sub-command specifying the game state (game state offset value), a sub-command specifying the firing position, and a stop symbol of the first special symbol. Subcommand to specify the stop pattern of the second special symbol, subcommand to specify the special figure 1 reservation number, subcommand to specify the special figure 2 reservation number, subcommand to specify the value of the time saving counter, RAM230 subcommands for designating the setting values stored in the setting value area of .

At step S1-34, an initial display time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-35. In the initial display time setting process, the initial display time of the performance display device 206 is set in the initial display timer.
At step S1-35, an interrupt setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to the main loop process (step S2-1). In the interrupt setting process, initial setting of a CTC (counter/timer circuit), which is a peripheral device, is performed.
Specifically, in the interrupt setting process, an interrupt vector register is set, and an interrupt count value (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment) is set in the CTC.

(main loop processing)
Next, main loop processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing main loop processing.
After completing the CPU initialization process (step S1-35) shown in FIG. 8, the CPU 210 starts the main loop process shown in FIG. The main loop processing is processing based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop processing is processing based on the program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 .
When the main loop process is started, first, the process moves to step S2-1.
In step S2-1, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-2. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt prohibition state is set to prohibit interrupts of other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S2-2, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-3. In the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
Here, "initial value random number" is a random number for determining the initial value and end value of soft random numbers (hit pattern random numbers, reach mode random numbers, variation pattern random numbers, etc.) that are random numbers generated on the program.
That is, the value of the loop counter that generates soft random numbers is updated within a preset range from the initial value to the end value. The initial value and end value of the loop counter that generates soft random numbers are changed each time the value of the loop counter reaches the end value. At this time, the initial value and end value of the loop counter are determined based on the initial value random number.

At step S2-3, main command analysis processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-4. In the main command analysis process, the main command received from the payout control board 400 (the control command transmitted from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200) is analyzed, and the process according to the analysis result is executed.
In step S2-4, subcommand transmission processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-5. In the subcommand transmission process, the subcommand stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 is output to the transmission data register of the output port 205 (command output port 1).
As a result, the subcommand input to the transmission data register is stored (stored) in the FIFO buffer. Then, the subcommands stored in the FIFO buffer are transmitted to the effect control board 300 in a predetermined order by the transmission shift register.
At step S2-5, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-6. In the interrupt permission processing, the interrupt disabled state is canceled. As a result, during the period from the execution of the interrupt permission process of step S2-5 to the execution of the interrupt prohibition process of step S2-1, the execution of the saving process at power shutdown, the timer interrupt process, etc. is permitted. This is the interrupt enabled period.
In step S2-6, another random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-1. In the other random number update process, the software random numbers excluding the hit pattern random numbers (specifically, reach mode random numbers, variation pattern random numbers, etc.) are updated.

(Save processing when power is cut off)
Next, the power-off save process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the saving process at power-off.
The main control board 200 includes a power interruption detection circuit (not shown). The power cutoff detection circuit monitors the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 600 and outputs a power cutoff warning signal to the input port 204 when the value of the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined reference value.
When the CPU 210 receives the power-off notice signal, the CPU 210 starts the power-off saving process shown in FIG. 10 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop process. The power-off save process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the saving process at power-off is a process based on the program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 .
When the power-off saving process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S3-1.
In step S3-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-2. In the register saving process, the values of the registers used during execution of the main loop process are saved in the saving area of the RAM 230 .
In step S3-2, power-off notice signal read processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-3. In the power cut-off notice signal reading process, the power cut-off notice signal is read from the power cut-off detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power-off notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power-off notice signal of the input port 204 is read.
In step S3-3, based on the value read in step S3-2 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cut-off notice signal), whether the power cut-off notice signal is input from the power cut-off detection circuit. If it is determined that the power cut-off notice signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-4, and if it is determined that the power cut-off notice signal has not been input (No), goes to step S3-13.

In step S3-4, output port stop processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-5. In the output port stop processing, output of control signals and control commands by the output ports 205 (output port 0 to output port 4) is stopped.
Specifically, in the output port stop processing, the values of all bits included in the port registers of the output ports 205 (output port 0 to output port 4) are initialized. This stops the output of control signals and control commands from the output ports 205 (output port 0 to output port 4).
In step S3-5, a backup valid flag setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-6. In the backup valid flag setting process, a predetermined valid value is stored (saved) in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230 .

In step S3-6, checksum storage processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-7. In the checksum storage process, a checksum is calculated and stored.
Specifically, in the checksum storage process, first, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the use area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 . Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230 .
Next, based on the information stored in the non-use area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of RAM 230, a checksum is calculated. Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum area.
In step S3-7, RAM access prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-8. In the RAM access prohibition processing, processing for prohibiting access to the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access prohibition process, a value corresponding to access prohibition is stored as a RAM protection value in the RAM access protection area of the RAM 230 . As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is prohibited.

At step S3-8, a loop counter setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-9. In the loop counter setting process, a predetermined number of power-off notice signal reading times is set as the value of the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-9, power-off notice signal reading processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-10. In the power cut-off notice signal reading process, the power cut-off notice signal is read from the power cut-off detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power-off notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power-off notice signal of the input port 204 is read.
In step S3-10, based on the value read in step S3-9 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal), whether the power cutoff notice signal is input from the power cutoff detection circuit. If it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal has not been input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-11, and if it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal has been input (Yes). goes to step S3-8.

In step S3-11, loop counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-12. In the loop counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-12, it is determined whether or not the value of the return determination loop counter is "0". If it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is "0" (Yes), the CPU When it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S3-9.
In step S3-13, a register return process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the original process is returned to. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S3-1 is restored. After completion of the register return processing, the program returns to the main loop processing (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Timer interrupt processing)
Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.
The clock generation circuit 202 generates an interrupt request signal every predetermined interrupt period (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment).
In response to the generation of the interrupt request signal, the CPU 210 starts timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 11 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop processing. The main loop processing is processing based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop processing is processing based on the program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 .
When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the process moves to step S4-1.
In step S4-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during execution of the main loop process are saved in the save area of the RAM 230 .
In step S4-2, interrupt permission processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-3. In the interrupt permission processing, interrupts are permitted.

In step S4-3, dynamic port output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-4. Dynamic port output processing will be described later.
In step S4-4, port input processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-5. The port input process acquires the state of each switch/sensor.
The RAM 230 is provided with an ON state storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3).
In the port input process, it is determined whether or not each switch/sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3) is turned on. Here, the "on state" refers to a state in which the state in which the detection signal is not input (low level) changes to the state in which the detection signal is input (high level). At this time, based on the information set in the reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor, it is determined whether or not the switch/sensor is in the ON state.
When it is determined that each switch/sensor is in the ON state, "1" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state has not occurred for each switch/sensor, "0" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the switch/sensor.
In the following description, the value stored in the ON state storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor is referred to as the "switch bit data" of the switch/sensor.

At step S4-5, a gaming machine state flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-6. In the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the gaming machine status flag stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
In step S4-6, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-7, and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-9.
Here, based on the gaming machine state flag obtained in step S4-5, it is determined whether or not the game ready state has occurred. At this time, if the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state has been generated, and if it is not a value corresponding to the playable state, the gameable state is generated. determine that it is not.

In step S4-7, it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that an abnormal state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-8, and the abnormal state is If it is determined that it has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-19.
Here, based on the gaming machine state flag acquired in step S4-5, it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred. At this time, if the obtained gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to any one of the setting abnormal state, the RAM abnormal state, and the backup abnormal state, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred. If the obtained gaming machine state flag does not correspond to any one of the setting abnormal state, the RAM abnormal state, and the backup abnormal state, it is determined that the abnormal state has not occurred.

In step S4-8, setting-related processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. The setting-related processing will be described later.
In step S4-9, timer update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-10. In the timer update process, various timers are updated.
Specifically, in the timer update process, the value of various timer counters (special game timer, normal game timer, security timer, etc.) is updated.
At step S4-10, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-11. The initial value random number update process in step S4-10 is the same process as the initial value random number update process in step S2-2.
Specifically, in the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
In step S4-11, a hit symbol random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-12. In the winning symbol random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the winning symbol random number among the soft random numbers is updated.
In step S4-12, switch management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-13. In the switch management processing, processing (acquisition of various random numbers, etc.) is executed according to the state of each switch 101, 102, 104, 110 (whether or not the ON state is detected). The switch management processing will be described later.

At step S4-13, a special game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-14. In the special game management process, the operation of the special figure display device (the special figure 1 display device and the special figure 2 display device) and the operation of the special electric accessory 55a are managed. Special game management processing will be described later.
In step S4-14, normal game management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-15. The normal game management process manages the operation of the normal diagram display device and the operation of the normal electric accessory 52a. The normal game management process will be described later.
At step S4-15, a state management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-16. In the state management process, various errors (abnormal states) are determined, and settings are made according to the determination result.

At step S4-16, a winning opening switch process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-17. In the prize-winning switch process, processes (such as updating various counters) are executed according to the states of the switches 101, 102, 103, 105, and 106 (whether or not the ON state is detected).
In this embodiment, as prize ball control counters, a prize ball control counter 1 that stores the number of ball game balls that have entered the big prize opening 55 and the number of ball game balls that have entered the left other prize openings 57a to 57c are stored. A prize ball control counter 2 to be stored, a prize ball control counter 3 to store the number of ball game balls entering the right other prize opening 56, and the number of ball game balls entering the first starting hole 51 are stored. and a prize ball control counter 5 in which the number of ball game balls entering the second starting port 52 is stored.
In the winning hole switch process, it is determined whether or not the ON state is detected for each switch 101, 102, 103, 105, 106, and if it is determined that the ON state is detected, a prize ball control counter corresponding to the switch Add "1" to the values from 1 to 5.

In step S4-17, a payout control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-18. In the payout control management process, a payout command is generated based on the value of the prize ball control counter set in step S4-16, and the generated payout command is transmitted.
Specifically, in the payout control management process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (15 [balls] in this embodiment) of prize balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . Thereafter, when the game ball payout device 440 completes the payout of the prize balls, the payout control board 400 transmits a main command designating the completion of the payout to the main control board 200 . Then, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 1 in accordance with the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is equal to or greater than "1", a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (4 [balls] in this embodiment) of prize balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 2 in response to the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is equal to or greater than "1", a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (4 [balls] in this embodiment) of prize balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 3 in response to the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is equal to or greater than "1", it generates a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (4 [balls] in this embodiment) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 4 in accordance with the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is equal to or greater than "1", it generates a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 1 [ball]) of prize balls, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400 . After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 5 in response to the reception of the main command designating the completion of the payout.

In step S4-18, a firing position designation management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. In the firing position designation management process, processing related to designation of the firing position is executed.
Specifically, in the launch position designation management process, when changing from the state of specifying the launch of the game ball to the left path to the state of specifying the launch of the game ball to the right path (of the small winning game state or the big winning game state At the start, etc.), "1" is set in the launch position specification flag area of the RAM 230, and a subcommand specifying launching of the game ball to the right path is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a subcommand designating the launch of the game ball to the right path is transmitted to the effect control board 300 .
On the other hand, when the state of specifying the launch of the game ball to the right path is changed to the state of specifying the launch of the game ball to the left path (at the end of the time saving control, etc.), " 0”.
In this embodiment, while the "normal state" is occurring, "0" is set in the launch position specification flag area, and information specifying the left side path is displayed as the path to launch the game ball on the right-handed display device. be.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the "time saving state", the "small winning game state" or the "big winning game state", "1" is set in the launch position specification flag area, and the game ball is set as the path to be launched on the right-handed display device. , the right route information is displayed.

At step S4-19, an external information management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-20. In the external information management process, external information (external signal) to be output to the hall computer (or data display device) is set.
In this embodiment, the external information output from the pachinko machine 1 to an external device (an electronic device such as a hall computer, a data display device, etc.) includes information on the number of pattern determinations, starting gate information, jackpot information, security information, and an out gate. Payout number information, error occurrence information, etc. are defined.
"Symbol determination frequency information" is external information regarding the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variation display and stop display of special symbols). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the symbol determination frequency information to the hall computer (or data display device) every time the number of executions of the stop display of the special symbols reaches a predetermined number.
The “starting opening information” is external information regarding the entry of game balls into the starting openings 51 and 52 . The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the starting port information to the hall computer (or data display device) each time the ON state of the detection signal input from the starting port switches 101 and 102 is detected.
The "jackpot information" is external information about the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state. The main control board 200 outputs an external signal corresponding to the jackpot information to the hall computer (or data display device) each time a jackpot game state is generated.
The "outlet payout information" is external information about the number of game balls ejected from the ejection path (or the number of game balls ejected from the outlet 58). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the out-out slot payout number information to the hall computer each time the value of the out-ball number counter for external information reaches a predetermined value.
The "security information" is external information indicating that a setting change state is occurring, a setting confirmation state is occurring, or various errors (abnormalities) are occurring. CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the security information to the hole computer when the value of the security timer is "1" or more.

In the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information determination number counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). When it is determined that the value of the external information fixed number counter has reached a predetermined value, the pattern fixed number information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . After that, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information fixed number counter. As a result, pattern determination frequency information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information starting entrance ball entry count counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [time] in the present embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the external information starting hole entry number counter has reached a predetermined value, the starting hole information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . After that, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]) is subtracted from the value of the external information starting entrance number counter. As a result, starting point information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Also, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information jackpot frequency counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). When it is determined that the value of the external information jackpot frequency counter has reached a predetermined value, the jackpot information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . Thereafter, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information jackpot number counter. As a result, jackpot information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Also, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information out-ball number counter has reached a predetermined value (10 [balls] in this embodiment). When it is determined that the value of the external information out ball number counter has reached a predetermined value, the out outlet payout information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . Thereafter, a predetermined value (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information out-ball number counter. As a result, out-port payout information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Also, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is a value corresponding to the game ready status.
Then, it is determined that the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is not a value corresponding to the game ready state (setting change state, setting confirmation state, setting error state, RAM error state, or backup error state). value), the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 . As a result, security information (external signal) is output to the hole computer.
Furthermore, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the security timer is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the security timer is equal to or greater than "1", the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. FIG. As a result, security information (external signal) is output to the hole computer.

At step S4-20, an LED display setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-21. In the LED display setting process, display data to be output to the main display device 60 or the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with a common 0 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 1 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 2 output request buffer (8 bits), and a common 3 output request buffer (8 bits). It is
In the LED display setting process, first, the common 2 output request buffer is cleared (initialized), and the common 3 output request buffer is cleared (initialized). Specifically, each bit value of the common 2 output request buffer is set to "0", and each bit value of the common 3 output request buffer is set to "0".
Next, the gaming machine status flag stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Then, when the obtained gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to the game ready state, the normal display data setting process described later is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to the setting change state, a display data setting process at the time of setting change, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine state flag has a value corresponding to the setting confirmation state, the display data setting process at the time of setting confirmation, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine state flag is a value corresponding to an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state), an abnormality display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed.

In the normal display data setting process, first, the value of the special figure 1 display pattern counter is obtained, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the value of the special figure 1 display pattern counter obtained is transferred to the common 0 output request buffer. set.
As a result, the first special symbol is displayed by the LED1 to LED8 among the light emitting elements forming the main display device 60. FIG.
Next, the value of the special figure 2 display pattern counter is acquired, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the value of the acquired special figure 2 display pattern counter is set in the common 1 output request buffer.
As a result, the second special symbol is displayed by the LEDs 9 to 16 among the light emitting elements forming the main display device 60 .
Next, the value of the general-purpose map display symbol counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value of the general-purpose map display symbol counter is set as the output data a.

Next, the values set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning of the RAM 230 are "pre-open state of the first large winning opening", "control state of opening the first large winning opening", and "effective closing of the first large winning opening". state", "waiting state for completion of opening of the first large prize-winning opening", "state before opening the second large-winning It is determined whether or not the value designates one of the special game phases out of "2 big prize opening end wait states".
Then, the value set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning is "state before opening the first big winning prize", "control state for opening the first big winning prize", "effective state for closing the first big winning prize", ``Wait state for ending the opening of the 1st major winning prize'', ``Pre-opening state of the 2nd major winning prize'', ``Control state of opening the 2nd major winning prize'', ``Closed effective state of the 2nd major winning prize'' and ``Second prize winning When it is determined that the value designates one of the special game phases in the mouth open end wait state, the value set in the special symbol determination flag area of the RAM 230 (the value corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol) Display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as output data b.
On the other hand, the values set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning are the "state before opening the first large winning opening", "control state for opening the first large winning opening", "valid state for closing the first large winning opening", ``Wait state for ending the opening of the 1st major winning prize'', ``Pre-opening state of the 2nd major winning prize'', ``Control state of opening the 2nd major winning prize'', ``Closed effective state of the 2nd major winning prize'' and ``Second prize winning When it is determined that it is not a value specifying any special game phase in the mouth open end wait state, the output data b is not set.

Next, the value set in the firing position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data c.
Next, the display data (8 bits) obtained by ORing the output data a to output data c is set in the common 2 output request buffer.
As a result, the normal symbols are displayed by the LEDs 17 and 18 among the light-emitting elements constituting the main display device 60, and the number of round games executed during the big win game state by the LEDs 19 to 23 (type of the big win game state). is displayed, and the LED 24 displays the path (left path or right path) along which the game ball should be launched.
Next, the value of the special figure 1 pending number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data d.
Next, the value of the special figure 2 pending number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data e.
Next, the value of the normal figure reservation number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data f.

Next, it is determined whether or not the power supply is restored.
And when it determines with it being the power return time, the value set to the time saving control flag area|region is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value are set as the output data g.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the power is not restored, the output data g is not set.
Next, the value set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data h.
Next, display data (8 bits) obtained by ORing output data d to output data h is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the main display device 60, the LEDs 25 and 26 display the number of reserved special figures 1, the number of reserved special figures 2 is displayed by the LEDs 27 and 28, and the number of reserved special figures 2 is displayed by the LEDs 29 and 30. The number of holdings is displayed, the game state at the time of power return (executing or stopping the time saving control) is displayed by the LED 31, and the current game state (executing or stopping the time saving control) is displayed by the LED 32. .

In the setting change display data setting process, information indicating that a setting change state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and the settings stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are set. Information indicating the value is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and "-" is set. is set in the common 2 output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the set value stored in the set value area of the RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the LEDs 33 to 40 display the character "r", the LEDs 41 to 48 display the character "n.", and the LEDs 49 to 56 display the character ""-" is displayed, and the numbers indicating the set values are displayed by the LEDs 57 to 64.

In the setting confirmation display data setting process, information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and the setting stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 is set. Information indicating the value is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data of "r" (8 bits) is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data of "n." (8 bits) is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the RAM 230 is set. The display data corresponding to the setting value stored in the value area is set in the common 3 output request buffer. No display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (clear value remains).
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the LEDs 33 to 40 display the character "r", the LEDs 41 to 48 display the character "n." A number indicating the value is displayed. Note that the LEDs 49 to 56 are turned off.

In the abnormal display data setting process, information indicating that an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer. At the same time, an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data of "E" (8 bits) is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data of "r." (8 bits) is set in the common 1 output request buffer, Display data (error code) corresponding to the state (setting error state, RAM error state, or backup error state) is set in the common 3 output request buffer. No display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (clear value remains).
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the LEDs 33 to 40 display the character "E", the LEDs 41 to 48 display the character "r.", and the LEDs 57 to 64 display the error A number representing the code is displayed. Note that the LEDs 49 to 56 are turned off.

At step S4-21, a solenoid data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-22. In the solenoid data setting process, control data (driving data) to be output to each solenoid 64 , 65 , 66 is stored (set) in the port output request buffer of RAM 230 .
In step S4-22, port output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-23. In port output processing, various signals are output to the hall computer, solenoids 64, 65, 66, and the like.
Specifically, in the port output process, various information (external signal, control signal, etc.) set in the port output request buffer is output to the output ports 205 (output port 2, output port 3). As a result, the external signal set in the port output request buffer is output to the hall computer. Further, each solenoid 64, 65, 66 is driven and controlled based on the drive signal set in the port output request buffer.
In step S4-23, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-24. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt prohibition state is set to prohibit interrupts of other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.

In step S4-24, test signal output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-25. In the test signal output process, test information (test signal) is set.
The test signal output process is a process based on a program for executing a test-related process defined by gaming machine regulations. That is, the test signal output processing is processing based on the program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220 . The test signal tube is invoked during execution of timer interrupt processing.
Specifically, in the test signal output process, the test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (jackpot game state, time saving control execution status, etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
In step S4-25, performance display device control processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-26. The performance display device control processing will be described later.
In step S4-26, a register return process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the original process is returned to. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S4-1 is restored. After completion of the register return processing, the program returns to the main loop processing (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Dynamic port output processing)
Next, the dynamic port output processing in step S4-3 will be described.
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing dynamic port output processing.
When the dynamic port output process is executed in step S4-3, as shown in FIG. 12, the process first proceeds to step S29-1.
In step S29-1, output data clear processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-2. In the output data clear process, the A register is cleared (initialized). Specifically, "0" is set as each bit value of the A register.
In step S29-2, main display device data output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-3. In the main display device data output process, the value of the A register (value cleared in step S29-1) is output to output port 0. FIG. As a result, the output port 0 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the main display device 60 becomes low level.
In step S29-3, performance display device data output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-4. In the performance display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to the output port 4. FIG. As a result, the output port 4 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the performance display device 206 becomes low level.

In step S29-4, common selection processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-5. In the common selection process, the value of the common counter is updated.
Specifically, in the common selection process, it is determined whether or not the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit (“3” in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the common counter has not reached the upper limit value, "1" is added to the value of the common counter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit, a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is set as the value of the common counter.
In step S29-5, common output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-6. In common output processing, output data corresponding to the value of the common counter is output to output port 1 .
Specifically, in the common output process, when the value of the common counter is "0", the output data is output with "COM0" set to high level and "COM1", "COM2", and "COM3" set to low level. Output to port 1. As a result, "COM0" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“1”, output data is output to the output port 1 with “COM1” set to high level and “COM0”, “COM2”, and “COM3” set to low level. As a result, "COM1" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“2”, output data is output to the output port 1 with “COM2” set to high level and “COM0”, “COM1”, and “COM3” set to low level. As a result, "COM2" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“3”, output data is output to the output port 1 with “COM3” set to high level and “COM0”, “COM1” and “COM2” set to low level. As a result, "COM3" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".

In step S29-6, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S29-7, and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S29-11.
Here, based on the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined whether or not the game ready status has occurred. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state has occurred. It is determined that no possible state has occurred.

In step S29-7, main display device data acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-8. In the main display device data acquisition process, display data for the main display device 60 is acquired and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the main display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is checked. Then, among the common 0 to common 3 output request buffers of the RAM 230, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is stored in the A register. set.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“1”, the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“2”, the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“3”, the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the main display device data acquisition process is the common The display data are set in the 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer.

In step S29-8, main display device data output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-9. In the main display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-7 is output to output port 0. FIG.
As a result, the data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer) are output to the source driver. 250a.
That is, the display on the main display device 60 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer).

In step S29-9, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-10. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt prohibition state is set to prohibit interrupts of other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S29-10, performance display device output processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-4) is performed. Performance display device output processing will be described later.

In step S29-11, performance display device data acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-12. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is checked. Then, among the common 0 to common 3 output request buffers of the RAM 230, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is stored in the A register. set.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“1”, the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“2”, the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“3”, the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is the LED display setting process of step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt process (specifically, the display data setting process at the time of setting change, setting confirmation In the time display data setting process or the abnormal time display data setting process), it becomes the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer.

In step S29-12, performance display device data output processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-4) is performed. In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-11 is output to the output port 4. FIG.
As a result, the data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer) are output to the source driver. 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer).

(Performance display device output processing)
Next, the performance display device output process in step S29-10 will be described.
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing performance display device output processing.
Performance display device output processing is processing based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 . That is, the performance display device output processing is processing based on the program stored in the non-use area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220 . Performance display device output processing is called during execution of dynamic port output processing.
When the performance display device output process is called in step S29-10, as shown in FIG. 13, the process first proceeds to step S30-1.
In step S30-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-2. In the register saving process, the values of all the registers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to the saving area of the RAM. Also, the values of all stack pointers used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved in the save area of the RAM.

In step S30-2, performance display device data acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is checked. Then, the display data set in the area corresponding to the value of the confirmed common counter is acquired from the identification segment output request buffer and the ratio segment output request buffer of the RAM 230, and the acquired display data is set in the A register. .
At this time, when the value of the common counter=“0”, the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“1”, the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“2”, the display data set in the high-order 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter=“3”, the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired by the performance display device data acquisition process is set in the identification segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer in the performance display device control processing of step S4-25 included in the previous timer interrupt processing. displayed data.

In step S30-3, performance display device data output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-4. In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S30-2 is output to the output port 4. FIG.
As a result, data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) based on the display data set in the output request buffer (identification segment output request buffer or ratio segment output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (the identification segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer).

In step S30-4, register restoration processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-5. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S30-1 (the value of the register used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) and the The value of the saved stack pointer (the value of the stack pointer used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) is restored.
In step S30-5, interrupt permission processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-4) is performed. In the interrupt permission processing, the interrupt disabled state is released. As a result, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like is permitted.

(Setting-related processing)
Next, the setting-related processing in step S4-8 will be described.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing setting-related processing.
When the setting-related process is executed in step S4-8, as shown in FIG. 14, the process first proceeds to step S37-1.
In step S37-1, it is determined whether or not the setting change state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the setting change state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-2, and the setting If it is determined that no change state has occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S37-8.
Here, based on the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined whether or not the setting change status has occurred. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the setting change state, it is determined that the setting change state has occurred. Determine that no change state has occurred.

In step S37-2, set value acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the setting value acquisition process, the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are acquired (loaded) and the acquired setting values are stored in the register.
In step S37-3, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed. If it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-4, and the RAM clear switch is pressed. 207 is not pressed (No), the process proceeds to step S37-5.
Here, if the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed, and if it is not turned on, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has not been pressed. judge.
In step S37-4, set value update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-5. In the set value update process, "1" is added to the set value stored in the register.

In step S37-5, it is determined whether or not the set value stored in the register is less than a predetermined set comparison value ("6" in this embodiment). is not less than the set comparison value (the set value is equal to or greater than the predetermined set comparison value) (No), the process proceeds to step S37-6, and the set value stored in the register is compared with the predetermined set comparison value. If it is determined to be less than the value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-7.
In step S37-6, set value initialization processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-7. In the setting value initialization process, the setting value stored in the register is overwritten with a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment).
In step S37-7, set value saving processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-8. In the setting value saving process, the setting values stored in the register are saved in the setting value area of the RAM 230 .

In step S37-8, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state. If it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is not in the ON state (is in the OFF state) (No), If it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is ON (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-19). .
Here, if the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state. It is determined that it is not.
In step S37-9, a subcommand setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-10. In the subcommand setting process, a setting-related end specifying command (subcommand) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

In step S37-10, subcommand group setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-11. In the subcommand group setting process, the subcommand group is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230 .
Here, the subcommand group includes a subcommand that specifies the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand that specifies the firing position, a subcommand that specifies the stop symbol of the first special symbol, and a stop symbol of the second special symbol. Subcommand to specify the pattern, subcommand to specify the special figure 1 reservation number, subcommand to specify the special figure 2 reservation number, subcommand to specify the value of the time saving counter, setting stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 It includes subcommands that specify values.
At step S37-11, the RAM set process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the next process (step S4-19) is performed. In the RAM set process, a playable state is set as the gaming machine state.
Specifically, a value corresponding to the playable state is stored (saved) as a value (gaming machine state flag) in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 .

(switch management processing)
Next, the switch management processing of step S4-12 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing switch management processing.
When the switch management process is executed in step S4-12, as shown in FIG. 15, the process first proceeds to step S5-1.
In step S5-1, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the gate switch 104 has been detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the gate switch 104 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-2, and the gate switch 104 is detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the switch 104 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-3.
In step S5-2, normal chart starting ball detection processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-3. Normal figure starting ball detection processing will be described later.

In step S5-3, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 starting opening switch 101 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting opening switch 101 is detected (Yes), step If the process proceeds to S5-4 and it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 is not detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-5.
In step S5-4, a special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-5. The special figure 1 starting ball detection processing will be described later.
In step S5-5, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 starter switch 102 is detected, and if it is determined that the on state of the special figure 2 starter switch 102 is detected (Yes), step If the process proceeds to S5-6 and it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 is not detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-7.

In step S5-6, a special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-7. The special figure 2 starting ball detection processing will be described later.
In step S5-7, it is determined whether or not the ON state of V-region switch 110 has been detected. If it is determined that the ON state of V-region switch 110 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-8. If it is determined that the ON state of the V-region switch 110 has not been detected (No), the series of processing ends and the next processing (step S4-13) is performed.
In step S5-8, V passage detection processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-13) is performed.
In the V passage detection process, first, it is determined whether or not it is during the V valid period.
Here, the "V effective period" is the effective time (interval time) has elapsed.
Then, when it is determined that it is during the V valid period, "1" is set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230, and the V winning designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the V valid period, the process ends.

(normal figure starting ball detection processing)
Next, normal figure starting ball detection processing in step S5-2 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the normal pattern starting ball detection process.
When the normal chart starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-2, as shown in FIG. 16, the process first proceeds to step S6-1.
In step S6-1, normal figure random number acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-2. In the general pattern random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random numbers) such as the per pattern random number and the general pattern random number are obtained (loaded) from the loop counter corresponding to each lottery.
In step S6-2, it is determined whether the value of the normal pattern reservation number counter is the upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment), and if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern reservation number counter is not the upper limit value (No), the process proceeds to step S6-3, and if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern pending number counter is the upper limit value (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S5- 3).
In step S6-3, normal figure pending number counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-4. In the general pattern reservation number counter update process, the value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the general pattern reservation number counter is newly set to the general pattern reservation number counter.

In step S6-4, the general pattern random number storage process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3). In the general pattern random number storage process, the per random number and the general pattern random number obtained in step S6-1 are stored in the general pattern game information storage area of the RAM 230 as general pattern game information.
The RAM 230 includes a general game information storage area in which general game information is stored.
The general pattern game information storage area is configured to include a storage area 0 to a storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing general pattern game information.
In the storage area 0, the general pattern game information during execution of the game is stored. On the other hand, in the storage area 1 to storage area 4, the normal game information in which the normal game hit-lose determination is suspended is stored. The priority of each storage area is defined to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (higher to lower) in descending order of priority. Then, the normal game information stored in the storage area 1 to the memory area 4, the normal game hit-loss determination is executed in order from the one stored in the storage area with the higher priority.
In addition, in the general pattern random number storage process, a general pattern reservation number designation command that specifies that the general pattern reservation number has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

(Special figure 1 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process of step S5-4 will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-4, as shown in FIG. 17, the process first proceeds to step S7-1.
In step S7-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 . In addition, "1" is added to the value of the external information starting entrance ball entry count counter.
In step S7-2, a pending number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-3. In the pending number counter address setting process, in the pending number counter address setting area of the RAM 230, the address of the special figure 1 pending number counter is set.
In step S7-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special figure 2 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process of step S5-6 will be described.
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-6, as shown in FIG. 18, the process first proceeds to step S8-1.
In step S8-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 . In addition, "1" is added to the value of the external information starting entrance ball entry count counter.
Also, in the special symbol identification value setting process, it is determined whether or not it is during the period of hitting to the right. When it is determined that the ball is not in the right-handed period (it is in the left-handed period), "1" is added to the value of the right-handed error counter.
In step S8-2, a pending number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-3. In the pending number counter address setting process, in the pending number counter address area of the RAM 230, the address of the special figure 2 pending number counter is set.
In step S8-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-7). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special symbol random number acquisition process)
Next, the special symbol random number acquisition process of steps S7-3 and S8-3 will be described.
FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the special symbol random number acquisition process.
When the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed in steps S7-3 and S8-3, as shown in FIG. 19, the process first proceeds to step S9-1.
In step S9-1, a special symbol identification value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-2. In the special symbol identification value acquisition process, the special symbol identification value set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-2, a special figure pending number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-3. In the special figure reservation number acquisition process, the value of the special figure reservation number counter (special figure 1 reservation number counter or special figure 2 reservation number counter) specified by the address set in the reservation number counter address area (special figure 1 reservation Get (load) the number or special figure 2 pending number).

In step S9-3, a special random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-4. In the special random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random numbers) such as jackpot random numbers, winning pattern random numbers, reach group random numbers, reach mode random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers are acquired (loaded) from loop counters corresponding to each lottery. At this time, a corresponding loop counter is selected based on the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1.
In step S9-4, the special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) acquired in step S9-2 is the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the upper limit value of special figure 1 reservation number = "4 ", Upper limit of special figure 2 reservation number = "1"), and if it is determined that the number of special figure reservations is not the upper limit value (No), go to step S9-5, If it is determined that the number of special figures pending is the upper limit (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13 or S5-5).
In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of special figures 2 reserved = "1". However, the upper limit value of the special figure 2 reservation number = "0" may be set.
In step S9-5, a special figure pending number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-6. In the special figure pending number counter update process, the value set in the special figure pending number counter (special figure 1 pending number counter or special figure 2 pending number counter) specified by the address set in the pending number counter address area The value obtained by adding "1" to is newly set to the special figure pending number counter.

In step S9-6, a special random number saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-7. In the special figure random number saving process, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the special figure game information storage area (special figure 1 game Information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area).
The RAM 230 includes a special figure 1 game information storage area in which special figure 1 game information is stored and a special figure 2 game information storage area in which special figure 2 game information is stored.
The special figure 1 game information storage area includes storage area 0 to storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing special figure 1 game information.
In the storage area 0, the special figure 1 game information during execution of the game is stored. On the other hand, the storage area 1 ~ storage area 4, the special figure 1 game information is stored start determination is pending. The priority of each storage area is defined to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (higher to lower) in descending order of priority. Then, the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 1 to the storage area 4, starting determination is executed in order from the one stored in the storage area with the higher priority.
The special figure 2 game information storage area is configured to include storage area 0 to storage area 1 as a storage area capable of storing special figure 2 game information.
In the storage area 0, the special figure 2 game information during execution of the game is stored. On the other hand, the memory area 1 stores the special figure 2 game information in which the start determination is suspended.

In the special figure random number storage process, if the special symbol identification value obtained in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are used as special figure 1 game information. , is stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in an empty memory area (among the empty memory areas, the memory area with the highest priority) among the memory areas 1 to 4. .
That is, when the value of the current special figure 1 pending number counter = "1", various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 1. On the other hand, when the value of the current special figure 1 pending number counter = "2", various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 2. If the value of the current special figure 1 pending number counter = "3", various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 3. If the value of the current special figure 1 pending number counter = "4", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 4.
On the other hand, if the special symbol identification value obtained in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 as special figure 2 game information, special figure 2 game Store in the information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in storage area 1. FIG.
That is, when the value of the current special figure 2 pending number counter = "0", various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 1.

In step S9-7, a hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-8. In the pending number specification command setting process, a special figure pending number specifying command that specifies that the special figure pending number (special figure 1 pending number or special figure 2 pending number) has increased by "1" is sent to the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 memorize to At this time, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the special figure reservation number specifying that the special figure 1 reservation number has increased by "1" The specified command is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230, and if the value corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the special figure 2 reservation number is specified to be increased by "1". The command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230 .

In step S9-8, a preliminary determination process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13 or S5-5). In the prior determination process, the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure) saved (stored) in the special figure game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area) in step S9-6 2 game information) (hereinafter referred to as "pre-determined game information"), various lottery results are pre-determined.
In this embodiment, for all game information (special figure 1 game information and special figure 2 game information), prior determination of various lottery results is performed.
In addition, regarding the game information acquired (stored) during the occurrence of the jackpot game state, the prior determination of various lottery results may not be performed. In addition, for the special figure 2 game information acquired (stored) during the stop of the time saving control, the pre-determination of various lottery results is not executed, and the special figure 1 game information acquired (stored) during the execution of the time saving control , may be configured such that the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed.

In prior determination processing, first, per prior special figure determination processing is executed.
In the preliminary special figure hit determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery ("big hit", "small hit" or "loss") is determined (preliminary special figure hit determination).
The ROM 220 stores a special symbol big winning lottery table in which the big winning values of the special symbol lottery are registered and a special symbol small winning lottery table in which the small winning values of the special symbol lottery are registered. Also, as a special figure small winning lottery table, a special figure small winning lottery table corresponding to the special figure 1 game information and a special figure small winning lottery table corresponding to the special figure 2 game information are stored.
In the preliminary special figure hit determination process, first, the preliminary special figure big hit determination process is executed.
In advance special figure big hit decision processing, the special figure big hit lottery table is read. Then, based on the big win random number included in the game information to be pre-determined and the read-out special big win lottery table, it is determined whether or not the "big win" is won (preliminary special big win determination).
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the game information subject to preliminary determination matches the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "jackpot" has been won (special pattern lottery). The result is judged as a “jackpot”). On the other hand, when the jackpot random number included in the game information to be pre-determined does not match the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "jackpot" has not been won.

When it is determined that the "big hit" is not won by the preliminary special figure big hit determination process, next, the preliminary special figure small hit determination process is executed.
In the preliminary special figure small hit determination process, the special figure small hit lottery table corresponding to the type of the preliminary determination target game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is read. Then, based on the big hit random number included in the game information to be pre-determined and the read special figure small winning lottery table, it is determined whether or not the "small hit" is won (preliminary special figure small winning determination). .
At this time, if the big hit random number included in the pre-determination target game information matches the small hit value registered in the special small hit lottery table, it is determined that the "small hit" has been won (special The result of the pattern lottery is determined as a "small hit"). On the other hand, when the big hit random number included in the game information to be pre-determined does not match the small hit value registered in the special small prize lottery table, it is determined that the "small hit" has not been won.
When it is determined that the "small hit" is not won by the advance special symbol small hit determination processing, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be "loss".
At this time, as described above, if the reservation type of the pre-determination target game information is the special figure 1 game information, one of the "big hit" and "loss" is determined ("small hit" is determined never).
On the other hand, when the reservation type of the pre-determination target game information is the special figure 2 game information, one of the "big hit" and the "small hit" is determined.

In advance determination processing, next, advance special symbol design determination processing is executed. In the prior special symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (preliminary special symbol determination).
In the prior special symbol determination process, when it is determined as "big hit" (winning) by preliminary special symbol determination, the type of "big hit symbol" is determined (preliminary special symbol determination).
The ROM 220 stores a jackpot symbol lottery table in which correspondence between a jackpot symbol random number and a type of "big hit symbol" is registered. Also, as the jackpot symbol lottery tables, a first jackpot pattern lottery table corresponding to the special figure 1 game information and a second jackpot pattern lottery table corresponding to the special figure 2 game information are stored.
In the first big-hit symbol lottery table, "big-hit symbol 1" is registered as the type of the "big-hit symbol". On the other hand, "jackpot symbol 2" is registered in the second jackpot symbol lottery table as the type of the "jackpot symbol".
Then, in the process of determining the type of "big hit symbol", when the pre-determination target game information is the special figure 1 game information, the first big hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read first big winning symbol lottery table, the type of the big winning symbol is determined.
On the other hand, when the pre-determination target game information is the special figure 2 game information, the second big hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read second big winning symbol lottery table, the type of the big winning symbol is determined.

On the other hand, in the prior special symbol determination process, when it is determined as "small hit" (winning) by preliminary special symbol determination, the type of "small hit design" is determined (preliminary special symbol determination).
The ROM 220 stores a small winning symbol lottery table in which correspondences between winning symbol random numbers and types of "small winning symbols"("small winning symbol 1") are registered.
Then, in the process of determining the type of "small winning design", the small winning design lottery table is read. Then, the type of the small winning symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read small winning symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, in the preliminary special figure design determination process, when it is determined as "lost" (defeated) by the preliminary special figure hit determination, "lost design" is determined as the type of stop design (preliminary special figure design determination).

In the advance determination process, next, a first prefetch designation command setting process is executed.
In the first look-ahead specification command setting process, the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 stores a first look-ahead specification command that specifies the type of the stop symbol determined by the pre-special symbol symbol determination.

In advance determination processing, next, advance special figure variation mode determination processing is executed.
In the advance special figure variation mode determination process, a variation mode number (variation mode type) and a variation pattern number (variation pattern type) are determined.
In the pre-special figure variation mode determination process, if it is determined as "big hit" or "small hit" by the pre-special figure hit determination, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and , and a variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) are determined.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be "missing" by the pre-special figure hit determination, the variation mode number (variation mode type), the variation pattern number (variation pattern type), and the is determined.

In the prior variation pattern determination process at winning, first, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) is determined (prior variation mode determination at winning).
The ROM 220 stores a winning variation mode determination table in which correspondence between reach mode random numbers and variation mode numbers (variation mode types) is registered.
In addition, as a winning fluctuation mode determination table, the reservation type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the game state ("normal state" or "time saving state"), and the type of stop design ("jackpot design 1”, “big hit pattern 2” or “small hit pattern 1”), and a winning fluctuation mode determination table corresponding to each combination is stored.
In each winning variation mode determination table, each reach mode random number corresponds to a variation mode number (variation mode type) and a winning variation pattern determination table (information specifying the winning variation pattern determination table). attached. As a result, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the winning variation pattern determination table are simultaneously selected based on each winning variation mode determination table.
In the determination of the prior variation mode at the time of winning, first, the reservation type of the pre-determination target game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the current game state ("normal state" or "time saving state"), The type of the stop symbol determined by the prior special symbol symbol determination is confirmed, and the winning variation mode determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the winning variation pattern determination table are determined based on the reach mode random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read winning variation mode determination table. do.
In the prior variation pattern determination process at winning, next, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined (prior variation pattern determination at winning).
The ROM 220 stores a winning variation pattern determination table in which correspondences between variation pattern random numbers and variation pattern numbers (variation pattern types) are registered.
Also, a plurality of winning variation pattern determination tables having different contents are stored as the winning variation pattern determination table.
In the winning-time prior variation pattern determination, first, the winning-time variation pattern determination table determined by the winning-time prior variation mode determination is read.
Then, the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read winning variation pattern determination table.

In the preliminary fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of defeat, first, the type (“indefinite value” or “fixed value”) of the reach group random number included in the preliminary determination target game information is determined (preliminary random number type determination).
In this embodiment, "indefinite value" and "fixed value" are defined as the types of reach group random numbers.
"Indefinite value" is, at the time of acquisition (storage) of game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), variation mode number (variation mode type), variation pattern number (variation pattern type), Is not determined, based on the game information start determination (step S11-7, S11-8, S11-11) at the time of execution, based on the number of reservations at that time (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) , Variation mode number (variation mode type) and variation pattern number (variation pattern type) are the types of reach group random numbers determined.
"Fixed value" is, at the time of acquisition (storage) of game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), a variation mode number (variation mode type), a variation pattern number (variation pattern type), is the type of reach group random number that is determined.
In this embodiment, the value of the reach group random number is updated within the range of "0" to "10006". Among "0" to "10006", "0" to "8499" are set as "indefinite values", and "8500" to "10006" are set as "fixed values".
Therefore, in the pre-random number type determination, if the value of the reach group random number included in the pre-determination target game information is less than "8500", it is determined as "indefinite value", and if it is "8500" or more, "fixed value ” is determined.

In the preliminary fluctuation pattern judgment process at the time of defeat, if the preliminary random number type judgment is determined to be "indefinite value", the advance reach group judgment, the preliminary fluctuation mode judgment at the time of defeat, and the preliminary fluctuation pattern judgment at the time of defeat, which will be described later, are executed. Proceed to the next process without
On the other hand, if the preliminary random number type determination is "fixed value", preliminary reach group determination, preliminary fluctuation mode determination at the time of failure, and preliminary fluctuation pattern determination at the time of failure are performed.

In prior reach group determination, reach group number (type of reach group) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a reach group determination table in which correspondence between reach group random numbers and reach group numbers (types of reach groups) is registered.
Also, as reach group determination tables, a reach group determination table corresponding to "indefinite value" and a reach group determination table corresponding to "fixed value" are stored.
In the reach group determination table corresponding to "indefinite value", the reach group number corresponding to "indefinite value" (hereinafter referred to as "indefinite value reach group") is registered as the reach group number. On the other hand, in the reach group determination table corresponding to the "fixed value", the reach group number corresponding to the "fixed value" (hereinafter referred to as "fixed value reach group") is registered as the reach group number.
In prior reach group determination, the reach group determination table corresponding to the "fixed value" is read. Then, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined based on the reach group random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read reach group determination table.

In the prior variation mode determination at the time of failure, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) is determined (prior variation mode determination at the time of failure).
The ROM 220 stores a failure change mode determination table in which correspondence between reach mode random numbers and change mode numbers (variation mode types) is registered.
In addition, as a change mode determination table when losing, the reach group number, the reservation type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the number of reservations (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number), and the game State ("normal state" or "working time saving state"), and the change mode determination table at the time of rejection corresponding to each combination is stored.
In each reach fluctuation mode determination table, each reach mode random number corresponds to a fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and a fluctuation pattern judgment table at loss (information specifying the fluctuation pattern judgment table at loss). attached. As a result, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the failure variation pattern determination table are simultaneously selected based on each failure variation mode determination table.
At the time of defeat in the prior fluctuation mode determination, first, the reach group number determined by the prior reach group determination, the holding type of the pre-determination target game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), and the pre-determination target game Confirm the number of reservations corresponding to the reservation type of information (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) and the current game state ("normal state" or "time saving state"), and in this confirmation result Read out the corresponding change mode determination table at the time of failure.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read fluctuation mode determination table at the time of defeat, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the variation pattern determination table at the time of defeat are determined. do.

In the prior variation pattern determination at the time of failure, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined (prior variation pattern determination at the time of failure).
The ROM 220 stores a failure variation pattern determination table in which correspondences between variation pattern random numbers and variation pattern numbers (variation pattern types) are registered.
Further, a plurality of failure variation pattern determination tables having mutually different contents are stored as the failure variation pattern determination table.
In the preliminary fluctuation pattern determination at the time of failure, first, the fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of failure determined by the preliminary variation mode determination at the time of failure is read.
Then, the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read-out failure variation pattern determination table.

In the advance determination process, next, second and third look-ahead designation command setting processes are executed.
In the second and third look-ahead specification command setting processing, the second look-ahead specification command that specifies the variation mode number determined by the prior variation mode determination, and the third look-ahead that specifies the variation pattern number determined by the prior variation pattern determination The designated command and are stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, when the winning prior variation pattern determination process is executed, the second look-ahead designation command for specifying the variation mode number determined by the winning prior variation mode determination and the winning prior variation pattern determination Determined by and a third prefetch designation command designating the variation pattern number obtained are stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
On the other hand, when the preliminary fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of failure is executed, and it is determined to be a "fixed value" by prior random number type determination, a second look-ahead specification command that specifies the variation mode number determined by the preliminary variation mode determination at the time of failure , and a third look-ahead designation command designating the variation pattern number determined by prior variation pattern determination at the time of rejection are stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
On the other hand, when the preliminary fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of failure is executed, and it is determined as "undefined value" by prior random number type determination, the second look-ahead designation command that designates "undefined value" and the second look-ahead designation command that designates "undefined value" 3 prefetch designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

(Special game management processing)
Next, the special game management process of step S4-13 will be explained.
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing special game management processing.
In this embodiment, the game (hereinafter referred to as "special game") executed based on the special symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "special game") phase / stage (hereinafter referred to as "special game phase") as "special symbol variation waiting state" , ``Special figure fluctuating state'', ``Special figure stop symbol display state'', ``First big prize opening pre-open state'', ``First big prize opening control state'', and ``First big prize opening Closing enabled state", "Waiting state for ending the opening of the first big prize winning opening", "State before opening the second big winning prize", "Controlled state for opening the second big winning prize", and "Closed the second big winning prize "Valid state" and "Wait state for ending the opening of the second big prize opening" are stipulated.
Then, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (special game phase flag) corresponding to one of the "11" special game phases is set.
Also, the ROM 220 stores a special game control module corresponding to each special game phase as a special game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the special game.
Then, in the special game management process, a special game control module corresponding to the value set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and a process based on the selected special game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the special game management process is executed in step S4-13, as shown in FIG. 20, the process first proceeds to step S10-1.
In step S10-1, special game phase acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-2. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S10-2, a special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-3. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (special game phase) acquired in step S10-1 is read.
In step S10-3, a special game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game control module execution process, the process based on the special game control module read in step S10-2 is started.
Specifically, when the value obtained in step S10-1 is a value corresponding to the "special figure fluctuation waiting state", the later-described special figure fluctuation waiting process is started, and the "special figure fluctuation state" If it is a value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation process described later is started, and if it is a value corresponding to the "special figure stop symbol display state", the special figure stop process described later is started, If the value corresponds to the "pre-opening state of the first big winning opening", the processing before opening the first big winning opening, which will be described later, is started, and the value corresponds to the "control state of opening the first big winning opening". In this case, the first big winning hole opening control process to be described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "first big winning hole closing valid state", the first big winning hole closing valid process to be described later is started. If the value corresponds to the "first big winning opening end wait state", the first big winning mouth opening end wait process described later is started, and corresponds to the "second big winning mouth opening pre-open state". If the value corresponds to the second big winning hole opening pre-processing described later, and if the value corresponds to the "second big winning hole opening control state", the second big winning hole opening described later is started. When the control process is started and the value corresponds to the "second big winning opening closing valid state", the second big winning opening closing valid process to be described later is started, and the "second big winning opening closing end waiting state" is started. , a wait process for ending the opening of the second big winning opening, which will be described later, is started.

(Special figure fluctuation waiting process)
Next, the special figure variation waiting process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a special figure variation waiting process.
When the special figure variation waiting process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 21, the process first proceeds to step S11-1.
In step S11-1, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "1" or more, and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is not "1" or more (No) , moves to step S11-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 pending number counter is greater than or equal to "1" (Yes), moves to step S11-3.
In step S11-2, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter is "1" or more, and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 reservation number counter is "1" or more (Yes) In, if it moves to step S11-3 and determines that the value of the special figure 1 pending number counter is not "1" or more (No), it moves to step S11-16.

In step S11-3, a special figure pending number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-4. In the special figure reservation number update process, the special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure reservation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "1" or more.
Then, if the value of the special figure 2 pending number counter is "1" or more, the value (in this embodiment, "1") specifying the game based on the special figure 2 game information as the special symbol discrimination flag set value Along with setting, subtract "1" from the value of the special figure 2 pending number counter.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is not "1" or more (the value of the special figure 2 reservation number counter is "0"), special figure 1 game information as a special symbol discrimination flag set value A value (in this embodiment, "0") specifying a game based on is set, and "1" is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 pending number counter.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 game information stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area is prioritized over the special figure 1 game information stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area. A start determination is performed.
In addition, the special figure 1 game information stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area is prioritized over the special figure 2 game information stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area, and the start determination is executed. Any configuration is acceptable.

In step S11-4, a hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-5. In the pending number specification command setting process, a special figure pending number specifying command specifying that the special figure pending number has decreased by "1" is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
Specifically, when the special symbol discrimination flag set value = "1", a special figure pending number designation command specifying that the special figure 2 pending number has decreased by "1" is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230. do.
On the other hand, if the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", a special figure reserved number designation command specifying that the special figure 1 reserved number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S11-5, a special pattern storage area shift process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-6. In the special symbol storage area shift process, the storage area in which the game information is stored is shifted.
Concretely, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value=“1”, the storage contents of the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, clear (initialize) the storage contents of the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area.
On the other hand, if the set value of the special symbol discrimination flag=“0”, the contents stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, clear (initialize) the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area.

In step S11-6, setting abnormality determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-7. In the setting error determination process, occurrence of setting error is monitored.
Specifically, in the setting abnormality determination process, first, the setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 is obtained. Next, it is determined whether or not the acquired setting value is less than a predetermined setting comparison value (“6” in this embodiment).
When it is determined that the obtained set value is not less than the predetermined set comparison value (is greater than or equal to the predetermined set comparison value), the value of the game machine state flag area (game machine state flag) of the RAM 230 is set to the set abnormal state. Store (save) the corresponding value. Also, a subcommand specifying the occurrence of a setting error is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (step S11-7).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the acquired setting value is less than the predetermined setting comparison value, the next process (step S11-7) is performed.

In step S11-7, a special figure hit determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-8. In the special figure hit determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined (special figure hit determination).
In the special figure hit determination process, first, the special figure big hit determination process is executed.
In the special figure big hit determination process, first, the value (set value) set in the setting value area is checked, and the special figure big hit lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, based on the big hit random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read special figure big hit lottery table, it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a "big hit" (special Figure jackpot judgment).
Specifically, when the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 matches the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, the result of the special pattern lottery is determined. It is judged as a "jackpot" (winning).
On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 does not match the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "jackpot" has not been won. do.
When it is determined that the "big hit" is not won by the special figure big hit determination process, the special figure small hit determination process is executed.
In the special figure small hit determination process, the special figure small hit lottery table corresponding to the special symbol discrimination flag set value is read. Then, whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a "small win" based on the value of the big win random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read special figure small win lottery table. To determine (special figure small hit determination).
Specifically, when the value of the big hit random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 matches the value of the small hit registered in the special small prize lottery table, the special symbol lottery is performed. The result is determined as a "small hit" (winning).
On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 does not match the jackpot value registered in the special-picture jackpot lottery table, the "jackpot" is won. judge not.
When it is determined that the "small hit" is not won by the special symbol small hit determination processing, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be "loss".

In step S11-8, a special symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-9. In the special symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (special symbol determination).
Concretely, in the special figure design determination processing, first, it is determined whether or not it is determined as a "big hit" (election) by special figure hit determination.
Then, when it is determined as "big hit" (winning) by the special figure hit determination, the type of "big hit design" is determined.
For this, the jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the set value of the special symbol discrimination flag is read. Then, based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read-out big winning symbol lottery table, the type of the big winning symbol is determined.
At this time, as described above, when the game information stored in the storage area 0 is the special figure 1 game information, "big hit pattern 1" is determined.
On the other hand, when the game information stored in the storage area 0 is the special figure 2 game information, "big hit pattern 2" is determined.
On the other hand, when it is determined as "small hit" (winning) by the special figure hit determination, the type of "small hit design" is determined.
For this, the small winning design lottery table corresponding to the set value of the special design discrimination flag is read. Then, the type of the small winning symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read small winning symbol lottery table.
At this time, "small winning symbol 1" is determined.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be "lost" (lost) by the special figure hit determination, "missing design" is determined as the type of the stop design.
Next, the symbol information designating the type of the determined stop symbol is set (stored) in the symbol information storage area of the RAM 230 .

In step S11-9, a pattern type designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-10. In the symbol type designation command setting process, a special symbol type designation command designating the type of the stop symbol determined in step S11-8 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S11-10, a special figure stop pattern number determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-11. In the special figure stop design number determination process, the stop design number of the special design is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a stop symbol number lottery table in which correspondences between winning symbol random numbers and stop symbol numbers (segment data) are registered.
In addition, as stop pattern number lottery tables, a stop pattern number lottery table for big wins corresponding to "big hits", a stop pattern number lottery table for small wins corresponding to "small wins", and a stop pattern number lottery table for losers corresponding to "losses". A pattern number lottery table is stored.
In addition, as a jackpot stop pattern number lottery table, a jackpot stop pattern number lottery table corresponding to the first special pattern (special figure 1 game information) and a jackpot time corresponding to the second special pattern (special figure 2 game information) A stop symbol number lottery table is stored.
In the special figure stop pattern number determination process, first, the result of the special figure hit determination is confirmed.
Then, when it is determined as a ``big hit'' (winning) by the special figure hit determination, the setting value of the special symbol determination flag is confirmed, and the stop symbol number lottery table at the time of the big hit corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read-out big-hit stop symbol number lottery table.
On the other hand, when it is determined as "small hit" (winning) by the special figure hit determination, the stop symbol number lottery table at the time of small hit is read. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read small winning stop symbol number lottery table.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be "lost" (lost) by the special figure per determination, the stop design number lottery table is read when losing. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read stop symbol number lottery table upon losing.
Next, the determined stop symbol number is stored in the stop symbol number storage area of the RAM 230 .

In step S11-11, a special figure variation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-12. In the special figure variation pattern determination process, the variation mode (variation pattern type) of the special symbol is determined.
Specifically, in the special figure variation pattern determination process, first, the result of the special figure per determination is confirmed. And, if the result of the special figure hit determination is a loss ("missing"), a special figure variation determination process at the time of loss, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination is winning ("big win" or "minor win"), special figure variation mode determination processing at the time of winning, which will be described later, is executed.

In the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of defeat, first, the type of reach group random number ("undefined value" or "fixed value") included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 is determined (random number type determination).
In the random number type determination, if the value of the reach group random number contained in the game information stored in the storage area 0 is less than "8500", it is determined as "indefinite value", and if it is "8500" or more, it is determined as " fixed value”.
In the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of defeat, next, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined (reach group determination).
In reach group determination, when "fixed value" is determined by random number type determination, the reach group determination table corresponding to "fixed value" is read. On the other hand, when "undefined value" is determined by random number type determination, the reach group determination table corresponding to "undefined value" is read. Then, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined based on the reach group random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read reach group determination table.
In the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of defeat, next, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) is determined (variation mode determination at the time of defeat).
In the determination of fluctuation mode at the time of defeat, the reach group number determined by reach group determination, the pending type (type of game information stored in storage area 0), the number of pending (game information stored in storage area 0) The number of reservations corresponding to the type of ) and the current game state ("normal state" or "time saving state") are confirmed, and the change mode determination table at the time of defeat corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read-out fluctuation mode determination table at the time of defeat, the fluctuation mode number (variation mode type) and the fluctuation pattern judgment at the time of defeat Determine the table and
In the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of defeat, next, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined (variation pattern determination at the time of defeat).
In the failure variation pattern determination, first, the failure variation pattern determination table determined by the failure variation mode determination is read.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read-out failure variation pattern determination table.

In the special figure variation mode determination process when winning, first, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) is determined (variation mode determination when winning).
In the winning variation mode determination, first, the pending type (the type of game information stored in the storage area 0), the current game state ("normal state" or "time-saving state"), and is determined by the special pattern determination. The type of the stopped symbol is confirmed, and the fluctuation mode determination table at the time of winning corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read winning variation mode determination table, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and winning variation pattern determination Determine the table and
In the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of winning, next, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined (variation pattern determination at the time of winning).
In the winning variation pattern determination, first, the winning variation pattern determination table determined by the winning variation mode determination is read.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read winning variation pattern determination table.

In step S11-12, a variation pattern command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-13. In the variation pattern command setting process, a special figure variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) determined in step S11-11 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-13, a special figure fluctuation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-14. In the special figure fluctuation time setting process, the time for the special symbol fluctuation display is set.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation time setting process, first, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number determined in step S11-11 is obtained. And, the acquired fluctuation time is set to the special game timer.

In step S11-14, a special figure variation display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-15. In the special figure fluctuation display data setting process, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the special figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set to the special figure display timer.
Next, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", a predetermined initial value is set to the special figure 1 display symbol counter. By this, lighting control of the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter is performed among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device.
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", a predetermined initial value is set to the special figure 2 display symbol counter. By this, lighting control of the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure 2 display pattern counter is performed among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device.

In step S11-15, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure fluctuating state" is set.
In step S11-16, a customer waiting setting process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the customer waiting setting process, the demonstration designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

(Processing during special figure fluctuation)
Next, the processing during special figure fluctuation executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing processing during special figure fluctuation.
When the special figure fluctuation process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 22, the process first proceeds to step S12-1.
In step S12-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S12-2 If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S12-7.
In step S12-2, a special figure stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-3. In the special figure stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the special game timer.

In step S12-3, a special figure stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-4. In the special figure stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the special figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the special figure stop display data setting process, the stop design number stored in the stop design number storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, when the special symbol discrimination flag set value = "0", the acquired stop symbol number (data corresponding to the stop symbol number) is set as the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter. Thereby, lighting control (stop display) is performed for the segment corresponding to the set stop design number among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device.
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", the acquired stop symbol number (data corresponding to the stop symbol number) is set as the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter. Thereby, lighting control (stop display) is performed for the segment corresponding to the set stop design number among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device.

In step S12-4, a stop designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-5. In the stop specified command setting process, the special figure stop specified command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Also, a predetermined number (1 [times] in the present embodiment) is added to the value of the external information fixed number counter.
In step S12-5, a number cutting management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-6. The number cutting management process will be described later.
In step S12-6, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure stop symbol display state" is set.

In step S12-7, it is determined whether the value of the special figure display timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is "0" (Yes), step S12- 8, and when it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S12-8, a special figure variation display data update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special figure fluctuation display data update process, the data for controlling the fluctuation display of the special figure display device is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure variation display data update process, when the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, "1" is added to the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, "1" is added to the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter.

(Number of cutting management processing)
Next, the number cutting management process executed in step S12-5 will be described.
FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the number cutting management process.
When the number cutting management process is executed in step S12-5, as shown in FIG. 23, the process first proceeds to step S28-1.
In step S28-1, it is determined whether or not the time saving control is being performed, and if it is determined that the time saving control is being performed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-2, and if it is determined that the time saving control is not being performed ( If No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S12-6).
Here, if the value set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is "1", it is determined that the time saving control is in progress, and if the value set in the time saving control flag area is "0", It judges that it is not in time saving control.
In step S28-2, it is determined whether or not to end the variable display of the first special symbol, and if it is determined to end the variable display of the first special symbol (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-3, When it is determined not to end the variable display of the first special symbol (to end the variable display of the second special symbol) (No), the process proceeds to step S28-7. In this embodiment, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", it is determined to end the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, and when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", the second special symbol It is determined that the variable display of is completed.

In step S28-3, the first time saving counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-4. In a 1st time saving counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of a 1st time saving counter.
In step S28-4, it is determined whether the value of the first time saving counter has been updated from "1" to "0" (whether "time saving end condition 1" has been established), and the value of the first time saving counter is updated from "1" to "0"("time saving end condition 1" is established) (Yes), the process moves to step S28-5, and the value of the first time saving counter is "1 ” to “0” (“time saving end condition 1” is not satisfied) (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S12-6) Transition.
In step S28-5, a time saving control stop process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-6. In time saving control stop processing, "0" is set to the time saving control flag area of RAM230. Moreover, "0" is set as a value of each time reduction counter (1st time reduction counter, 2nd time reduction counter, 3rd time reduction counter). Shortening of working hours control is stopped by this.
In step S28-6, a subcommand setting process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S12-6). In the subcommand setting process, a subcommand specifying a change in game state (stop of time saving control) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .
In step S28-7, a second time saving counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-8. In a 2nd time saving counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of a 2nd time saving counter.
In step S28-8, it is determined whether or not the value of the second time saving counter has been updated from "1" to "0" (whether or not "time saving end condition 2" has been established), and the value of the second time saving counter is updated from “1” to “0” (“time saving end condition 2” is established) (Yes), the process moves to step S28-5, and the value of the second time saving counter is “1 ” to “0” is not updated (“time saving end condition 2” is not satisfied) (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S12-6) Transition.

(Processing during special stop)
Next, the special figure stopping process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing processing during special figure stop.
When the special figure stopping process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 24, the process first proceeds to step S13-1.
In step S13-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S13-2 When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S13-2, it is determined whether or not the type of the stopped design is a "big hit design", and if it is determined that the type of the stopped design is a "big hit design" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-3. When it is determined that the type of the stopped symbol is not the "big hit symbol" (No), the process proceeds to step S13-8.
At step S13-3, game state update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-4. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, first, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 .
Then, when it is determined that "1" is set in the time saving control flag area, "0" is set as the value of each time saving counter (first time saving counter, second working time saving counter, third working time saving counter) At the same time, “0” is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 . Shortening of working hours control is stopped by this.
On the other hand, if it is determined that "1" is not set in the time saving control flag area ("0" is set), the process proceeds to the next step (step S13-4).
In step S13-4, a special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-5. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the special electric role item 55a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a second special electric role control table corresponding to each type of "jackpot symbol". Each second special electric role control table corresponds to the opening time, the closing effective time of the big winning gate, the closing time of the big winning gate, the ending time, the number of rounds (number of round games), and each round (round game). The number of opening/closing switching times, the control data (solenoid control data and control time data) of the special electric accessory solenoid 65 corresponding to each opening/closing switching, etc. are defined.
In the special electric role control data setting process, the second special electric role control table corresponding to the type of “jackpot symbol” determined in step S11-8 is read, and the read second special electric role control table is stored in the RAM 230 as a special electric role control table. Set in the electrical control table area.
Next, "0" is set in the counter for the number of times the special electric service has been continuously operated.

At step S13-5, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-6. In the opening time setting process, the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer.
In step S13-6, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-7. In the opening designation command setting process, the opening designation command designating the type of "jackpot design" determined in step S11-8 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Also, a predetermined number (1 [times] in this embodiment) is added to the value of the external information jackpot number counter.
In step S13-7, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the second big winning opening" is set.

In step S13-8, it is determined whether or not the type of the stopped design is a "small winning design", and if it is determined that the type of the stopping design is a "small winning design" (Yes), step S13- 9, and when it is determined that the type of the stopped symbol is not the "small winning symbol" (the "losing symbol") (No), the process proceeds to step S13-13.
In step S13-9, a special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-10. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the special electric role item 55a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a first special electric role control table corresponding to each type of "small winning symbol". And, in each first special electric role control table, there are opening time, big winning mouth closing valid time, big winning mouth closing time, ending time, number of rounds (number of small winning games), each round (small winning game). The number of times of opening and closing switching corresponding to , the control data (solenoid control data, control time data, etc.) of the special electric accessory solenoid 65 corresponding to the opening and closing switching of each time, the V area solenoid 66 corresponding to each round (small hit game) Control data (solenoid control data and control time data) and the like are defined.
In the special electric role control data setting process, the first special electric role control table corresponding to the type of "small winning symbol" determined in step S11-8 is read, and the read first special electric role control table is stored in the RAM 230. Set in the special electric role control table area.
Next, "0" is set in the counter for the number of times the special electric service has been continuously operated.

At step S13-10, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-11. In the opening time setting process, the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer.
In step S13-11, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-12. In the opening designation command setting process, the opening designation command designating the type of "small winning pattern" determined in step S11-5 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S13-12, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "first big winning opening pre-open state" is set.

In step S13-13, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure variation waiting state" is set.

(1st Grand Prize Opening Pre-Opening Process)
Next, the pre-opening process for the first big winning opening executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the pre-opening process of the first big winning hole.
When the first big winning hole pre-opening process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 25, the process first proceeds to step S14-1.
In step S14-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S14-2. When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S14-2, special electric service continuous operation number counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-3. In the special electric service continuous operation number counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter.
In step S14-3, a round start specifying command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-4. In the round start designation command setting processing, a round start designation command designating the start of the round corresponding to the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S14-4, a special electric service open/close switching number setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-5. In the special electric service open/close switching number setting process, the first special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the opening/closing switching number corresponding to the value of the special service continuous operation counter is set. read out. Then, the opening/closing switching frequency read out is set in the special electric service opening/closing switching frequency counter. Next, "0" is set as the value of the special electric winning number counter.
In step S14-5, a special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-6. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S14-6, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "first big winning opening open control state" is set.

(First big prize opening control process)
Next, the first big winning hole opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the first big winning hole opening control process.
When the first big winning hole opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 26, the process first proceeds to step S16-1.
In step S16-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S16-2 If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching number counter is "0". , the process proceeds to step S16-3, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service switching frequency counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5.
In step S16-3, a special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-4. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S16-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric role winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (10 [balls] in this embodiment). If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5. ends the series of processes and shifts to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S16-5, a special winning opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-6. In the big winning hole opening control end process, solenoid control data specifying de-energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the special electric accessory 55a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S16-6, a special winning opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-7. In the large winning opening closing valid time setting process, a predetermined large winning opening closing valid time (interval time) is set by referring to the first special electrical role control table set in the special electrical role control table area of the RAM 230. Set the game timer.
In step S16-7, a round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-8. In the round end designation command setting process, a round end designation command designating the end of the round (small winning game) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S16-8, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "first big winning opening closed valid state" is set.

(1st Grand Prize Opening Closing Effective Processing)
Next, a description will be given of the first big winning opening closing valid process executed in step S10-3.
FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the first big winning opening closing effective process.
When the first big winning opening closing valid process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 27, the process first proceeds to step S17-1.
In step S17-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S17-2 When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S17-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value (Yes ), the process proceeds to step S17-3, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process proceeds to step S17-9.
Here, the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the number of rounds specified in the special electric role control table is acquired as a specified value to make a determination. conduct.
In step S17-3, it is determined whether or not the value set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230 is "1", and it is determined that the value set in the V winning flag area is "1". If so (Yes), the process moves to step S17-4, and if it is determined that the value set in the V winning flag area is "0" (No), the process moves to step S17-11.

In step S17-4, game state update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-5. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, first, it is determined whether or not "1" or "2" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230.
Then, when it is determined that "1" is set in the time saving control flag area, a predetermined initial value (this In the embodiment, "0") is set, and "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. Shortening of working hours control is stopped by this.
On the other hand, when it is determined that "1" is not set in the time saving control flag area ("0" is set), the process proceeds to the next step (step S17-5).

In step S17-5, a special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-6. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the special electric role item 55a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a second special electric role control table corresponding to each type of "small winning symbol". Each second special electric role control table corresponds to the opening time, the closing effective time of the big winning gate, the closing time of the big winning gate, the ending time, the number of rounds (number of round games), and each round (round game). The number of opening/closing switching times, control data (solenoid control data, control time data, etc.) of the special electric accessory solenoid 65 corresponding to each opening/closing switching are stipulated.
In the special electric role control data setting process, the second special electric role control table (for the big win) corresponding to the type of "small winning symbol" determined in step S11-5 is read, and the read second special electric role control table is read. (for big wins) is set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 .
Next, "0" is set in the counter for the number of times the special electric service has been continuously operated.

At step S17-6, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-7. In the opening time setting process, the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer.
At step S17-7, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-8. In the opening designation command setting process, an opening designation command designating the start of the jackpot game state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-8, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the second big winning opening" is set.

In step S17-9, a big winning opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-10. In the big winning hole closing time setting process, the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined big winning hole closing time is set in the special game timer.
In step S17-10, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "first big winning opening pre-open state" is set.

In step S17-11, ending time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-12. In the ending time setting process, the first special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer.
In step S17-12, an ending specifying command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-13. In the ending specifying command setting process, the ending specifying command specifying the end of the small winning game state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-13, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "first big winning opening open end wait state" is set.

(Wait processing for ending the opening of the 1st big prize opening)
Next, the wait process for ending the opening of the first big winning opening executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the wait process for ending the opening of the first big winning opening.
When the first big winning hole opening end wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 28, the process first proceeds to step S18-1.
In step S18-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S18-2. When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S18-2, a V non-winning designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S18-3. In the V non-winning designation command setting process, the V non-winning designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S18-3, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure variation waiting state" is set.

(Second Grand Prize Opening Pre-Processing)
Next, the pre-opening process for the second big winning opening executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the pre-opening process for the second big winning opening.
When the second big winning hole pre-opening process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 29, the process first proceeds to step S40-1.
In step S40-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S40-2 When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S40-2, special electric service continuous operation number counter update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-3. In the special electric service continuous operation number counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter.
In step S40-3, a round start designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-4. In the round start designation command setting processing, a round start designation command designating the start of the round corresponding to the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S40-4, a process for setting the number of opening/closing times of special electric service is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-5. In the special electric service open/close switching number setting process, the second special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the opening/closing switching number corresponding to the value of the special service continuous operation counter is set. read out. Then, the opening/closing switching frequency read out is set in the special electric service opening/closing switching frequency counter.
Next, "0" is set as the value of the special electric winning number counter.
In step S40-5, a special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-6. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S40-6, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "second big winning opening open control state" is set.

(Second Grand Prize Opening Control Processing)
Next, the second big winning opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the second big winning hole opening control process.
When the second big winning hole opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 30, the process first proceeds to step S41-1.
In step S41-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S41-2 If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S41-4.
In step S41-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching number counter is "0". , the process proceeds to step S41-3, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service open/close switching frequency counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-5.
In step S41-3, a special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-4. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S41-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric role winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (8 [ball] in this embodiment), and the value of the special electric role winning number counter reaches a predetermined value. If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-5. ends the series of processes and shifts to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S41-5, a special winning opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-6. In the big winning opening opening control end process, solenoid control data specifying de-energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . Thereby, the second special electric accessory 55a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S41-6, a large winning opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-7. In the large winning opening closing effective time setting process, a predetermined large winning opening closing effective time (interval time) is set to a special Set the game timer.
In step S41-7, a round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-8. In the round end designation command setting process, a round end designation command designating the end of the round game is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S41-8, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "second big winning opening closed valid state" is set.

(Second Grand Prize Opening Closing Effective Processing)
Next, a description will be given of the second big winning opening closing effective process executed in step S10-3.
FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the second big winning opening closing effective process.
When the second big winning opening closing valid process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 31, the process first proceeds to step S42-1.
In step S42-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S42-2. When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S42-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value (Yes ), the process proceeds to step S42-3, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process proceeds to step S42-6.
Here, the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the number of round games specified in the special electric role control table is acquired as a specified value for determination. I do.

In step S42-3, ending time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-4. In the ending time setting process, the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer.
In step S42-4, an ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-5. In the ending specifying command setting process, the ending specifying command specifying the end of the jackpot game state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S42-5, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "second big winning opening end wait state" is set.
At step S42-6, a special winning opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-7. In the big winning hole closing time setting process, the second special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined big winning hole closing time is set in the special game timer.
In step S42-7, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the second big winning opening" is set.

(Wait processing for ending the opening of the second big prize opening)
Next, the waiting process for ending the opening of the second big winning opening, which is executed in step S10-3, will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the waiting process for ending the opening of the second big winning opening.
When the second big winning hole opening end wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 32, the process first proceeds to step S43-1.
In step S43-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S43-2 When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S43-2, game state setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-3. In the game state setting process, the game state is set.
Specifically, in the game state setting process, the game state at the time of execution of start determination (special figure hit determination) and the type of stop symbol ("big hit symbol" or "small hit symbol") are confirmed.
Then, when the game state at the time of execution of the start determination (special figure hit determination) is the normal state and the type of the stop symbol is "big hit symbol 1", "5" is set as the value of the first time saving counter. "100" is set as the value of the second time saving counter, "50" is set as the value of the third time saving counter, and "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. Shortening of working hours control is started by this.
On the other hand, when the game state at the time of execution of the start determination (special figure hit determination) is a time saving state and the type of the stop symbol is "big hit design 1", the value of the first time saving counter is set to "5". "400" is set as the value of the second time saving counter, "200" is set as the value of the third time saving counter, and "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. Shortening of working hours control is started by this.
On the other hand, when the game state at the time of execution of the start determination (special figure hit determination) is the normal state, and the type of the stop symbol is "big hit symbol 2", the value of the first time saving counter is set to "5". "400" is set as the value of the second time saving counter, "200" is set as the value of the third time saving counter, and "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. Shortening of working hours control is started by this.
On the other hand, when the game state at the time of execution of the start determination (special figure hit determination) is a time saving state, and the type of the stop symbol is "big hit design 2", "5" is set as the value of the first time saving counter. "400" is set as the value of the second time saving counter, "200" is set as the value of the third time saving counter, and "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. Shortening of working hours control is started by this.
On the other hand, when the game state at the time of executing the start determination (special figure hit determination) is the normal state, and the type of the stop symbol is "small hit symbol 1", the value of the first time saving counter is "5". , "400" is set as the value of the second time saving counter, "200" is set as the value of the third time saving counter, and "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. Shortening of working hours control is started by this.
On the other hand, when the game state at the time of execution of the start determination (special figure hit determination) is the time saving state and the type of the stop symbol is "small hit symbol 1", the value of the first time saving counter is "5". , "400" is set as the value of the second time saving counter, "200" is set as the value of the third time saving counter, and "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. Shortening of working hours control is started by this.
In the game state setting process, next, “0” is set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230 .

In step S43-3, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "special figure variation waiting state" is set.

(Special electric service opening/closing switching processing)
Next, the special electric service open/close switching process in steps S14-5, S16-3, S40-5 and S41-3 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the special electric service opening/closing switching process.
When the special electric power opening/closing switching process is executed in steps S14-5, S16-3, S40-5, and S41-3, as shown in FIG. 33, the process first proceeds to step S15-1.
In step S15-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service open/close switching number counter is "0". , the process proceeds to step S15-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service open/close switching frequency counter is "0" (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S14-6 , S16-4, S40-6, S41-4).
In step S15-2, a special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-3. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the special electric accessory 55a to be in an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control data setting process, the first special electric service control table or the second special electric service control table set in the special service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the special service opening/closing operation is performed. Read the solenoid control data corresponding to the value of the switching number counter. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data specifying energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the control of the special electric accessory solenoid 65 is started based on the set solenoid data, and the special electric accessory 55a is controlled to the open state or the closed state.

In step S15-3, a special electric service control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-4. In the special electric service control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S15-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control time setting process, the first special electric service control table or the second special electric service control table set in the special service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the special service opening/closing operation is performed. Read the control time corresponding to the value of the switching number counter. Then, the read control time is set to the special game timer.
In step S15-4, a special electric power opening/closing switching frequency counter update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the next process (steps S14-6, S16-4, S40-6, S41-4) is performed. . In the special electric service opening/closing switching frequency counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching frequency counter.

(Normal game management processing)
Next, the normal game management process of step S4-14 will be explained.
FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing normal game management processing.
Here, in the present embodiment, the game (hereinafter referred to as "normal game") executed based on the normal symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "normal game") phase / stage (hereinafter referred to as "normal game phase"), "normal pattern fluctuation waiting State", "Normal figure fluctuating state", "Normal figure stop pattern display state", "Normal figure electric accessory opening state", "Normal figure electric accessory open control state", "Normal figure electric accessory closed valid State" and "Wait state for the end of the opening of the general figure electric accessories" are defined.
Then, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (normal game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven normal game phases is set.
Also, the ROM 220 stores a normal game control module corresponding to each normal game phase as a normal game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the normal game.
Then, in the normal game management process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and the process based on the selected normal game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the normal game management process is executed in step S4-14, as shown in FIG. 34, the process first proceeds to step S19-1.
In step S19-1, normal game phase acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-2. In the normal game phase acquisition process, the value (normal game phase) set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S19-2, normal game control module acquisition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-3. In the normal game control module acquisition process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value (normal game phase) acquired in step S19-1 is read.

In step S19-3, a normal game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game control module execution process, the process based on the normal game control module read in step S19-2 is started.
Specifically, if the value obtained in step S19-1 is a value corresponding to the "normal pattern fluctuation waiting state", the normal pattern fluctuation waiting process described later is started, corresponding to the "normal pattern fluctuation state" If it is a value, the normal pattern fluctuation process described later is started, and if it is a value corresponding to the "normal pattern stop symbol display state", the normal pattern stop process described later is started, "Before opening normal electric accessories state”, the normal electric accessary product opening preprocessing described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the “normal electric accessary product opening control state”, the normal electric accessary product opening control process described later is performed. If it is a value corresponding to the "normal electric role product closed valid state", the normal electric role product closing valid process described later is started and the value corresponds to the "normal electric role product open end wait state" , The normal electric accessary product opening end wait process to be described later is started.

(Normal pattern change waiting process)
Next, normal figure fluctuation wait processing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing normal pattern change waiting processing.
When normal figure fluctuation waiting processing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 35, the process first proceeds to step S20-1.
In step S20-1, it is determined whether the value of the general pattern reservation number counter is "1" or more, and if it is determined that the value of the general pattern reservation number counter is "1" or more (Yes) , Move to step S20-2, if it is determined that the value of the normal figure pending number counter is not "1" or more (No), end the series of processes and move to the next process (step S4-15) do.

In step S20-2, normal figure pending number update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-3. In the general pattern reservation number update process, the general pattern reservation number is updated.
Concretely, in the general pattern reservation number update process, first, "1" is subtracted from the value of the general pattern reservation number counter.
Next, shift the storage area where the normal game information is stored. Concretely, the storage contents of the storage area 1 of the normal game information storage area are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 2 of the general-purpose game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 1 of the general-purpose game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 3 of the general-purpose game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 2 of the general-purpose game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the general-purpose game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 3 of the general-purpose game information storage area. Next, clear (initialize) the storage contents of the storage area 4 of the normal game information storage area.
Next, the general pattern reservation number specification command specifying that the general pattern reservation number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

In step S20-3, normal figure hit-lose determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-4. In the normal pattern lottery determination process, the result of the normal pattern lottery is determined (normal pattern hit/loss determination).
The ROM 220 stores a normal symbol lottery table in which the winning values of the normal symbol lottery are registered. In addition, as the normal figure win-lose lottery table, the normal figure win-lose lottery table corresponding to the execution of the time saving control and the normal figure win-lose lottery table corresponding to the stop of the time saving control are stored.
In this embodiment, the same winning probability (in this embodiment, 1/1) in the normal figure winning lottery table corresponding to the stop of the time saving control and the normal figure winning lottery table corresponding to the execution of the time saving control As shown, the hit value is registered.
Then, in the general pattern hit-lose determination process, the hit random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0, the normal pattern hit-lose lottery table corresponding to the current execution status of the time saving control (during execution or stopped), Based on, the normal figure hit-lose judgment is performed.
Specifically, when the value of the hit random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 matches the hit value, the result of the normal pattern lottery is determined as "normal pattern hit" (winning). do.
On the other hand, when the value of the winning random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 does not match the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined as "loss" (loss).

In step S20-4, normal pattern stop symbol determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-5. In the normal pattern stop symbol determination process, the type of the normal pattern stop symbol (stop symbol number) is determined (normal pattern stop symbol determination).
In the general pattern determination process, when it is determined as "per normal pattern" (election) by the normal pattern hit/loss determination, the type of "per normal pattern" is determined (perform normal pattern determination).
The ROM 220 stores a normal per pattern lottery table in which correspondence between general per per pattern random numbers and types of "general per per pattern" is registered. Then, in the normal per pattern lottery table, "per normal per pattern 1" and "per normal per pattern 2" are registered as the types of "per normal per pattern".
Then, in the general pattern determination process, based on the general pattern per pattern random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the general pattern per pattern lottery table, the type of general per pattern pattern (stop pattern) number).
On the other hand, when it is determined to be "lost" (lost) by the normal figure winning/losing determination, "missing symbol" is determined as the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number).
Next, the determined stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230 .
Next, a normal pattern type designation command for designating the determined stop design type (stop design number) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S20-5, normal figure fluctuation pattern determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-6. In the general pattern variation pattern determination process, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) in the normal pattern is determined (normal pattern variation pattern determination).
Specifically, in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination process, when the normal state is occurring, the first type (in this embodiment, the first fluctuation time (for example, the type corresponding to the fluctuation time of 60.0 [s])).
On the other hand, when the time saving state is occurring, the second type (in the present embodiment, the second variation time (eg, 30.0 [s]) as the type of normal figure variation pattern (variation pattern number) type corresponding to the fluctuation time of ).
Here, the second variable time is shorter than the first variable time.
Next, the normal figure fluctuation pattern designation command which designates the fluctuation pattern number which is decided (type of fluctuation pattern), is housed in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S20-6, normal figure fluctuation time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-7. In the general pattern fluctuation time setting process, the fluctuation time corresponding to the type of general pattern fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) determined in step S20-6 is obtained. And, the acquired fluctuation time is set to the normal game timer.
In step S20-7, normal figure fluctuation display data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-8. In the general pattern fluctuation display data setting process, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the general pattern display device is set.
Specifically, in the normal pattern fluctuation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the normal pattern display timer.
Next, a predetermined initial value is set in the general pattern display symbol counter. As a result, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal pattern display symbol counter among the predetermined number of segments constituting the normal pattern display device is controlled to be lit.
Next, predetermined segment data is set as segment data corresponding to the normal map display device. As a result, lighting of the segment corresponding to the set segment data is controlled among the predetermined number of segments that constitute the normal map display device.
In step S20-8, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the ordinary game phase update process, in the ordinary game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "ordinary figure fluctuating state" is set.

(Normal map fluctuation process)
Next, the process during normal figure fluctuation executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing processing during normal pattern fluctuation.
When the normal figure fluctuation process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 36, first, the process proceeds to step S21-1.
In step S21-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S21-2. Then, when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-4.
In step S21-2, it is determined whether the value of the normal map display timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the normal map display timer is "0" (Yes), step S21- 3, and when it is determined that the value of the normal map display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S4-15) is performed.
In step S21-3, normal figure fluctuation display data update processing is executed, a series of processing is completed, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal pattern fluctuation display data update process, the data for controlling the variable display of the normal pattern display device is updated.
Specifically, in the general pattern fluctuation display data update process, "1" is added to the value of the general pattern display symbol counter.

In step S21-4, a normal map stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-5. In the normal map stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the normal map display device is set.
Specifically, in the general pattern stop display data setting process, the stop pattern number stored in the stop pattern storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, the acquired stop design number is set as the value of the general-purpose diagram display design counter. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments that constitute the normal-symbol display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal-symbol display symbol counter is controlled to light up (stopped display).
Next, the normal map stop designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S21-5, normal figure stop time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-6. In the normal figure stop time setting process, the predetermined stop time is set to the normal game timer.
In step S21-6, a number cutting management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-7. The number cutting management process will be described later.
In step S21-7, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the ordinary game phase update process, in the ordinary game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal figure stop symbol display state" is set.

(Number of cutting management processing)
Next, the number cutting management process executed in step S21-6 will be described.
FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the number cutting management process.
When the number cutting management process is executed in step S21-6, as shown in FIG. 37, the process first proceeds to step S44-1.
In step S44-1, it is determined whether or not the time reduction control is in progress, and if it is determined that the time reduction control is in progress (Yes), the process proceeds to step S44-2, and if it is determined that the time reduction control is not in progress ( If No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S21-7).
Here, if the value set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is "1", it is determined that the time saving control is in progress, and if the value set in the time saving control flag area is "0", It judges that it is not in time saving control.
In step S44-2, a third time saving counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S44-3. In a 3rd time saving counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value of a 3rd time saving counter.
In step S44-3, it is determined whether or not the value of the third time saving counter has been updated from "1" to "0" (whether or not "time saving end condition 3" has been established), and the value of the third time saving counter is updated from "1" to "0"("time saving end condition 3" is established) (Yes), the process moves to step S44-4, and the value of the third time saving counter is "1 ” to “0” is not updated (“time saving end condition 3” is not satisfied) (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S21-7) Transition.
In step S44-4, a time saving control stop process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S44-5. In time saving control stop processing, "0" is set to the time saving control flag area of RAM230. Moreover, "0" is set as a value of each time reduction counter (1st time reduction counter, 2nd time reduction counter, 3rd time reduction counter). Shortening of working hours control is stopped by this.
In step S44-5, a subcommand setting process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S21-7). In the subcommand setting process, a subcommand specifying a change in game state (stop of time saving control) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 .

(Normal map stop processing)
Next, the process during normal figure stop executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing processing during normal map stop.
When the normal map stop process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 38, the process first proceeds to step S22-1.
In step S22-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S22-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S22-2, it is determined whether or not the stopped pattern is the "normal pattern per pattern", and if it is determined that the stopped pattern is not the "normal per pattern" (No), the process proceeds to step S22-3. However, when it is determined that the stopped symbol is the "normal pattern winning symbol" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-4.
In step S22-3, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal figure fluctuation waiting state" is set.

In step S22-4, normal electric service control data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-5. In the ordinary electric role control data setting process, control data for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 52a is set.
In the ROM 220, a game state ("normal state" or "time saving state") and a normal pattern corresponding to a combination of a "normal pattern per pattern"("normal pattern per pattern 1" or "normal pattern per pattern 2") Stores an electrical control table. In each ordinary electric duty control table, the time before opening the ordinary electric duty, the valid time for closing the ordinary electric duty, the waiting time for the end of opening, the number of open/close switching times, and the control data corresponding to each open/close switching (solenoid control data, control time, etc.) data), etc.
In particular, in the normal electric role control table that is selected when winning the "normal figure per symbol 1" based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state (time saving control flag area = "0"), the normal "Short release pattern" is specified as the release pattern of the normal electric accessory 52a during the occurrence of the per-figure game state.
In addition, in the normal electric role control table selected when the "normal pattern per pattern 2" is won based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state (time saving control flag area = "0"), the normal "Short release pattern" is specified as the release pattern of the normal electric accessory 52a during the occurrence of the per-figure game state.
In addition, in the normal electric role control table selected when winning the "normal pattern per pattern 1" based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (time saving control flag area = "1"), the normal "Short release pattern" is specified as the release pattern of the normal electric accessory 52a during the occurrence of the per-figure game state.
In addition, in the normal electric role control table that is selected when winning the “normal pattern per pattern 2” based on the normal symbol lottery executed during the time saving state (time saving control flag area = “1”), the normal A "long release pattern" is designated as the release pattern of the normal electric accessory 52a during the per-figure gaming state.
In the normal electric role control data setting process, the current game state (the value set in the time saving control flag area) and the "normal pattern per pattern"("normal per pattern 1" or "normal per pattern 2") , and sets the read normal electric role control table in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230 .
Next, referring to the ordinary electric work control table set in the ordinary electric work control table area of the RAM 230, the opening/closing switching times are read out. Then, the number of open/close switching times read out is set in the normal electric open/close switching number counter. In addition, "0" is set as the value of the winning number counter for the ordinary electric role.

At step S22-5, a normal electric service pre-opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. In the ordinary electric role opening time setting process, the ordinary electric role control table set in the ordinary electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined ordinary electric role opening time before the normal electric role opening is set in the ordinary game timer.
In step S22-6, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessary product opening pre-state" is set.

(Normal electric accessory opening preprocessing)
Next, the normal electric accessary product opening preprocessing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessory opening preprocessing.
When the normal electric accessary product opening preprocessing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 39, the process first proceeds to step S23-1.
In step S23-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S23-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S23-2, normal electric open/close switching processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S23-3. The ordinary electric open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S23-3, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessary product opening control state" is set.

(Normal electrical open/close switching process)
Next, the normal electric open/close switching process in steps S23-2 and S25-3 will be described.
FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the ordinary electric open/close switching process.
When the ordinary electric open/close switching process is executed in steps S23-2 and S25-3, as shown in FIG. 40, the process first proceeds to step S24-1.
In step S24-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter is "0". If it is determined that the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter is not "0" (No), , the process proceeds to step S24-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal electric switch opening/closing number counter is "0" (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S23-3 Or move to S25-4).
In step S24-2, normal electric service control data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-3. In the normal electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the normal electric accessory 52a to be in an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric power control data setting process, the normal electric power control table set in the normal electric power control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the solenoid corresponding to the value of the normal electric power open/close switching frequency counter is selected. Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data specifying energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, control of the normal electric accessory solenoid 64 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the normal electric accessory 52a is controlled to the open state or the closed state.

In step S24-3, normal electric service control time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. In the normal electric power control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S24-2 is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric service control time setting process, the normal electric service control table set in the normal service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the control corresponding to the value of the normal service open/close switching frequency counter is performed. read out the time. Then, the read control time is set to the normal game timer.
In step S24-4, normal electric switch open/close switching frequency counter update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S23-3 or S25-4) is performed. In the normal electric switch opening/closing number counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the normal electric switch opening/closing number counter is newly set in the normal electric opening/closing switching number counter.

(Normal electric accessory opening control process)
Next, the normal electric accessory opening control process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessary product opening control processing.
When the normal electric accessary product opening control process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 41, the process first proceeds to step S25-1.
In step S25-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S25-2 If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter is "0". If it is determined that the normal electric open/close switching frequency counter is not "0" (No) , the process proceeds to step S25-3, and when it is determined that the value of the normal electric switch opening/closing number counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5.
In step S25-3, normal electric open/close switching processing (see FIG. 39) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (3 [ball] in this embodiment), and the value of the normal electric winning number counter reaches a predetermined value. If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5. ends the series of processes and shifts to the next process (step S4-15).

In step S25-5, normal electric power opening control end processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-6. In the normal electric power opening control end process, solenoid control data specifying de-energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 . As a result, the normal electric accessory 52a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S25-6, normal electric service closing effective time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-7. In the ordinary electric role closing valid time setting process, the ordinary electric role closing valid time is set in the ordinary game timer by referring to the ordinary electric role control table set in the ordinary electric role control table area of the RAM 230 .
In step S25-7, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessary product closing valid state" is set.

(Normal electric accessory closing effective processing)
Next, the normal electric accessary product closing valid process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessary product closing valid processing.
When the ordinary electric accessary product closing valid process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 42, the process first proceeds to step S26-1.
In step S26-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S26-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
At step S26-2, an opening end wait time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26-3. In the opening end wait time setting process, the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and a predetermined opening end wait time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S26-3, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessary product open end wait state" is set.

(Normal electric accessory opening end wait process)
Next, the normal electric accessary product open end wait process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing normal electric accessary product opening end wait processing.
When the normal electric accessary product open end wait process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 43, the process first proceeds to step S27-1.
In step S27-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), to step S27-2 When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S27-2, normal game phase update processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the next processing (step S4-15) is performed. In the normal game phase update process, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to the "normal figure fluctuation waiting state" is set.

(Performance display device control processing)
Next, the performance display device control processing at step S4-25 will be described.
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing performance display device control processing.
The performance display device control processing is processing based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 . That is, the performance display device control processing is processing based on a program stored in the non-use area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220 . Performance display device control processing is called during execution of timer interrupt processing.
When the performance display device control process is called in step S4-25, as shown in FIG. 44, the process proceeds to step S38-1.
In step S38-1, register save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-2. In the register saving process, the values of all the registers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to the saving area of the RAM. Also, the values of all stack pointers used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved in the save area of the RAM.

In step S38-2, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-3, and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S38-11.
Here, based on the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined whether or not the game ready status has occurred. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state has occurred. It is determined that no possible state has occurred.
In step S38-3, total out counter addition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-4.
In the total count counter addition process, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the OUT switch 109 has been detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 is detected, "1" is added to the value of the total out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the total out counter is not added.

In step S38-4, it is determined whether or not it is in a predetermined game state, and if it is determined that it is in a predetermined game state (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-5, and it is determined that it is not in a predetermined game state. If so (No), the process proceeds to step S38-7.
Here, the "predetermined game state" is a game state in which the time saving control is stopped and the jackpot game state is not generated.
In step S38-5, normal out counter addition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-6.
In the normal out counter addition process, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the out switch 109 has been detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the OUT switch 109 is detected, "1" is added to the value of the normal OUT counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the OUT switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the normal OUT counter is not added.

In step S38-6, normal prize ball counter addition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-7.
In the normal prize ball counter addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of the game ball to the first start port 51. Add "4". On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting port switch 101 is not detected, the value of the normal ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of the game ball to the second start port 52. Add "2". On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting port switch 102 is not detected, the value of the normal ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the right winning opening switch 105 is detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the right winning hole switch 105 is detected, the value of the normal winning ball counter is added to the value of the normal winning ball counter, which is the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the entry of the game ball into the right other winning hole 56. ” is added. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the right winning hole switch 105 is not detected, the value of the normal winning ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the left winning port switch 106 is detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the left winning hole switch 106 is detected, the value of the normal winning ball counter is the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of game balls into the left other winning holes 57a to 57c. Add "4". On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the left winning hole switch 106 is not detected, the value of the normal winning ball counter is not added.

In step S38-7, it is determined whether or not the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value, and if it is determined that the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value (Yes), step S38-8. , and when it is determined that the value of the total out counter has not reached the reference value (No), the process proceeds to step S38-9.
In this embodiment, the reference value=60000×n (n=integer). "n" is a value indicating the current section, and is set to "1" as an initial value.
In step S38-8, section update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-9. In the section update process, the section is updated.
In the section update process, first, the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230 is shifted (moved) to the base value buffer 2 of the RAM 230 .
Next, a predetermined initial value ("0" in this embodiment) is set as the value of the normal out counter. Also, a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is set as the value of the normal winning ball counter.
Next, "1" is added to the value (n) indicating the current section. This updates the reference value.
At step S38-9, a base ratio calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-10. In the base ratio calculation process, a base ratio is calculated.
Specifically, in the base ratio calculation process, the base ratio is calculated based on the value of the normal out counter and the value of the normal ball counter. Then, the calculated base ratio is stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230 .
Here, the base ratio is the ratio of the value of the normal winning ball counter to the value of the normal out counter.

At step S38-10, base ratio display data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-11. In the base ratio display data setting process, display data to be output to the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with an identification segment output request buffer (16 bits) and a ratio segment output request buffer (16 bits).
In the base ratio display data setting process, first, which base ratio to display is selected from the base ratio of the current section and the base ratio of the previous section.
Then, when the display of the base ratio of the current section is selected, information indicating that it is the base ratio of the current section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the current section is set to Set to ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data of "b" (8 bits) is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, and the display data of "b" (8 bits) is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer. , the display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to The display data corresponding to the ones digit of is set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the character "b" is displayed by the LEDs 33 to 40, the character "b" is displayed by the LEDs 41 to 48, and the current state is displayed by the LEDs 49 to 56. A number indicating the tens digit of the base ratio is displayed, and a number indicating the ones digit of the current base ratio is displayed by the LEDs 57 to 64 .

On the other hand, if the display of the base ratio of the previous section is selected, information indicating that it is the base ratio of the previous section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the previous section is set to Set to ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data of "b" (8 bits) is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, and the display data of "c" (8 bits) is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer. , the display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to The display data corresponding to the ones digit of is set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the character "b" is displayed by the LEDs 33 to 40, the character "c" is displayed by the LEDs 41 to 48, and the current state is displayed by the LEDs 49 to 56. A number indicating the tens digit of the base ratio is displayed, and a number indicating the ones digit of the current base ratio is displayed by the LEDs 57 to 64 .

In step S38-11, register restoration processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-12. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S38-1 (the value of the register used during the execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) and the The value of the saved stack pointer (the value of the stack pointer used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) is restored.
At step S38-12, an interrupt permission process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-26). In the interrupt permission processing, the interrupt disabled state is canceled. As a result, execution of save processing at power-off, timer interrupt processing, and the like is permitted.

(Various productions executed in pachinko machine 1)
Next, various effects executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.

(Direction stage)
Next, the production stages set in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
A plurality of performance stages are defined in the pachinko machine 1, and one of the plurality of performance stages is set according to the progress of the game (game state). Then, various effects corresponding to the set effect stage are executed.
In the present embodiment, a rendering mode corresponding to each rendering stage is defined as the rendering mode of the background rendering. Then, the background effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the set effect stage.
The “background effect” is a background image displayed as the background of various effect images (effect patterns a1 to a6, reserved pattern h, etc.) displayed on the display screen 31a, and BGM (music) output from the various speakers 22. , It is a production including.
This allows the player to grasp (recognize) the current production stage based on the background production.
In this embodiment, two production stages (specifically, "production stage A" and "production stage B") are defined.
During the occurrence of the "normal state", the "production stage A" is set. On the other hand, while the "working time saving state" is occurring, the "production stage B" is set.
That is, while the "normal state" is occurring, the "effect stage A" is set, and the "background effect A" is executed as the background effect. On the other hand, while the "time saving state" is occurring, the "production stage B" is set, and the "background production B" is executed as the background production.
This allows the player to grasp (recognize) the current game state based on the effect stage (background effect).

(Variation production / stop production)
Next, variable effects and stop effects set in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, when the start determination (special figure hit determination, special figure pattern determination, special figure variation pattern determination, etc.) based on the special figure 1 game information is executed, the special figure 1 display device, the first special symbol After the variable display is executed, the stop display of the first special symbol is executed in a mode according to the result of the start determination.
At this time, as a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 (three special figure display areas), the variable display of the special figure mini effect symbol a1 is executed, In the fourth symbol display area A2 of FIG. 1, the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth effect symbol a2 is executed.
Further, as a stop effect corresponding to the stop display of the first special symbol, in the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 (three special symbol display areas), the special symbol mini effect symbol a1 is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol In the 1 4th symbol display area A2, the special figure 1 4th effect symbol a2 is stopped and displayed. At this time, the stop display of the performance symbols a1 and a2 is executed in a mode according to the result of the start determination.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when the start determination (special figure hit determination, special figure pattern determination, special figure variation pattern determination, etc.) based on the special figure 2 game information is executed, the second special After the variable display of the symbols is performed, the stop display of the second special symbol is performed in a mode according to the result of the start determination.
At this time, as a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, in the special figure mini symbol display area A1 (three special figure display areas), the variable display of the special figure mini effect symbol a1 is executed, In the fourth symbol display area A3 in FIG. 2, the variable display of the special figure 2 fourth effect symbol a3 is executed.
In addition, as a stop effect corresponding to the stop display of the second special symbol, in the special symbol mini symbol display area A1 (three special symbol display areas), the special symbol mini effect symbol a1 is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol In the second fourth symbol display area A3, the stop display of the special figure second fourth effect symbol a3 is executed. At this time, the stop display of the performance symbols a1 and a2 is executed in a mode according to the result of the start determination.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when the start determination (normal pattern win-lose determination, normal pattern stop pattern determination, normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) based on the normal pattern game information is executed, the normal pattern fluctuation After the display is executed, the stop display of the normal symbol is executed in a mode according to the result of the start determination.
At this time, as a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern, the variable display of the normal pattern mini pattern display area A4 (three general pattern display areas) is executed, and the variable display of the normal pattern mini pattern a4 is executed. In the 4-symbol display area A5, the variable display of the normal-symbol fourth effect symbol a5 is executed.
In addition, as a stop effect corresponding to the stop display of the normal pattern, in the normal pattern mini pattern display area A4 (three general pattern display areas), the stop display of the normal pattern mini effect pattern a4 is executed, and the normal pattern 4th In the symbol display area A5, the stop display of the normal figure fourth effect symbol a5 is executed. At this time, the stop display of the performance symbols a4 and a5 is executed in a mode according to the result of the start determination.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, in the main effect symbol display area A6 (three effect symbol display areas), depending on the game state, the variable effect/stop effect corresponding to the variable display/stop display of the special symbol, or the normal symbol A variable effect/stop effect corresponding to the variable display/stop display of is executed.
In this embodiment, the probability of winning the "normal pattern" by the normal symbol lottery is set to 1/1. However, during the occurrence of the normal state, the "short open pattern" is selected with a probability of 1/1 when the "normal pattern hit" is won by the normal pattern lottery. As a result, the second special symbol lottery is not executed even if the normal symbol lottery is won during the occurrence of the normal state. Therefore, the big win game state is generated only based on the first special symbol lottery. Then, during the occurrence of the normal state, the player pays attention to the result of the first special symbol lottery without paying attention to the result of the normal symbol lottery.
Therefore, during the occurrence of the normal state, in the main effect symbol display area A6 (three effect symbol display areas), a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol/second special symbol) is executed. In addition, a stop effect corresponding to the stop display of the special symbols (first special symbol/second special symbol) is executed.
That is, during the occurrence of the normal state, during the fluctuation display of the special design (first special design or second special design) in the special design display device (special design 1 display device or special design 2 display device), the special design As a variable effect corresponding to the variable display, the variable display of the main effect symbol a6 is executed in the main effect symbol display area A6 (each special symbol display area). Also, during the stop display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the special figure display device (special figure 1 display device or special figure 2 display device), stop production corresponding to the stop display of the special symbol As a result, the main effect symbol a6 is stopped and displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6 (each special symbol display area).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the "normal pattern winning" by the normal symbol lottery is set to 1/1. Further, during the occurrence of the time saving state, the "long open pattern" is selected with a probability of 656/65536. Also, the probability of winning a "big win" or "minor win" by the second special symbol lottery is set to 50[%]. As a result, during the occurrence of the time-saving state, when the "long opening pattern" is won, the possibility of the occurrence of the big win game state increases. Then, the player pays attention to the result of the normal symbol lottery (in particular, whether or not the "long open pattern" is won).
Therefore, during the occurrence of the time-saving state, in the main production pattern display area A6 (three production pattern display areas), a variable production corresponding to the variable display of the normal patterns is executed, and the stop display of the normal patterns is executed. It is configured such that a stop effect is executed.
That is, during the occurrence of the time saving state, in the main production design display area A6 (each special design display area) as a variation production corresponding to the variation display of the normal design during the variation display of the normal design in the normal design display device , the variable display of the main effect pattern a6 is executed. In addition, during the stop display of the normal pattern in the normal pattern display device, as a stop effect corresponding to the stop display of the normal pattern, the main effect pattern display area A6 (each special pattern display area), stop display of the main effect pattern a6. is executed.
At this time, when the "normal pattern winning pattern 2"("long open pattern") is won based on the normal pattern lottery executed while the time saving state is occurring, the "winning pattern" is displayed in the main effect pattern display area A6. ” is stopped and displayed.
On the other hand, when the "normal pattern per pattern 1"("short open pattern") is won based on the normal pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the time saving state, the "missing pattern" is displayed in the main effect pattern display area A6. The stop symbol corresponding to is stopped and displayed.
As a result, while the time saving state is occurring, it is possible to grasp whether or not the "long opening pattern" has been won based on the stop symbols stopped and displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, an effect for notifying the result of the special symbol lottery is executed by the main effect symbol a6 in the main effect symbol display area A6 during the occurrence of the normal state. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the time saving state, an effect for notifying the result of the normal symbol lottery is executed by the main effect symbol a6 in the main effect symbol display area A6.
Thus, in the pachinko machine 1, during the normal state, the performance for notifying the result of the special symbol lottery is mainly executed, and during the time-saving state, the result of the normal symbol lottery is mainly notified. A production is executed to do so. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability.
In particular, in this embodiment, when the "long open pattern" is won based on the normal symbol lottery, the aspect (combination) of the main effect symbol a6 that is stopped and displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6 and the occurrence of the normal state are described. The mode (combination) of the main performance pattern a6 stopped and displayed in the main performance pattern display area A6 is the same when a ``jackpot'' is won based on the first special pattern lottery executed in 1. That is, when the "long open pattern" is won based on the normal symbol lottery, the stop symbol corresponding to the "win symbol" is stop-displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6. On the other hand, when a ``jackpot'' is won based on the first special pattern lottery executed during the occurrence of the normal state, the stop pattern corresponding to the ``hit pattern'' is stop-displayed in the main performance pattern display area A6. The stop symbols corresponding to the "win symbols" are the main effect symbols a6 stopped and displayed in the three effect symbol display areas, and the same numbers such as "6, 6, 6", "7, 7, 7", etc. It is a display mode that is a combination that is aligned with the general pattern mini production pattern a4 indicating (identification information). As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that a big win game state will occur when the "long open pattern" is won based on the normal symbol lottery.
In addition, when the "long open pattern" is won based on the normal symbol lottery, the stop symbol corresponding to the "win symbol" is stop-displayed in the main effect symbol display area A6, and then the game goes to the second start port 52. A configuration may be adopted in which a display prompting the player to enter the ball (for example, a display of characters such as "Let the electric chew win the ball!") is executed. At this time, along with the display prompting the player to enter the game ball into the second start port 52, the period during which the game state per normal pattern is occurring (the period during which the normal electric accessory 52a is in the open state ) (hereinafter referred to as “opening suggesting display”) may be executed. The opening suggestion display is a display corresponding to the period in which the game state per normal pattern is generated (the period in which the normal electric accessory 52a is in the open state). That is, the opening suggestion display is a display that suggests the remaining period/remaining time for the period/time in which the normal game state is generated (the period/time in which the normal electric accessory 52a is in the open state). ing. As the opening suggestion display, for example, a display that counts down the remaining period/remaining time for the period/time in which the normal game state is generated (period/time in which the normal electric accessory 52a is in the open state) ( display with numbers subtracted), the period/time during which the normal game state is generated (the period/time during which the normal electric accessory 52a is in the open state), the meter time indicating the remaining period/remaining time It is possible to display a bar (a display in which the meter/time bar is reduced) and the like.
In addition, when the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52 is detected during the occurrence of the big win game state, priority is given to the effect corresponding to the big win game state (hereinafter referred to as "big win effect"). Then, an effect based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52 (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 entry effect") may be executed. The big-hit performance is a performance that is executed while the big-hit game state is occurring, and is a performance that suggests that the big-hit game state is occurring. The special figure 2 entry ball effect is an effect that suggests (informs) that the game ball enters the second start port 52 . That is, when the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52 is detected during the occurrence of the big hit game state, the special figure 2 is entered on the front side (upper layer) of the effect image that constitutes the big win effect. A performance image that constitutes the ball performance is displayed. As a result, at least a part of the effect image that constitutes the big hit effect is hidden by the effect image that constitutes the special figure 2 ball-entering effect.

(Modification)
Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, various modifications can be made to the above embodiments.
For example, in the above-described embodiment, when the passage of the starting gate 41 by the game ball is detected, general pattern game information (specifically, per random number and pattern random number per general pattern) is acquired. In addition, based on the normal game information, the normal game hit-lose determination is executed. Then, when "per normal pattern" is determined by the normal pattern hit/loss determination, the normal pattern per game state is generated. At this time, the probability that the "normal hit" is determined by the normal hit and drop determination is 1/1. As a result, when passage of the starting gate 41 by the game ball is detected (when the normal pattern win-lose determination is executed), the normal pattern per game state is generated with a probability of 100%, and the normal electric accessory 52a is opened. state.
However, the probability that "per normal" is determined by the normal pattern hit-lose determination may be a probability lower than 1/1. Thus, when passage of the starting gate 41 by the game ball is detected (when the normal pattern win-lose determination is executed), with a predetermined probability of less than 100%, the normal pattern per game state is generated, and the normal electric accessory 52a can be opened.
Alternatively, when the passage of the starting gate 41 by the game ball is detected, the general pattern game information (specifically, the winning random number and the general pattern random number) may not be acquired. That is, when passage of the starting gate 41 by the game ball is detected, the normal game per game state is always generated, and the normal electric accessory 52a may be in the open state. At this time, the opening pattern (“short opening pattern” or “short opening pattern”) of the normal electric accessory 52a is configured to be selected by lottery, and in particular, the probability of selecting the “long opening pattern” is increased by the game It has a different configuration depending on the state (“normal state” or “time saving state”).

(Action of pachinko machine 1)
In the pachinko machine 1, when the game ball passes through the first start port 51, the main control board 200 (step S7-3) for acquiring the special figure 1 game information, and the game ball passed through the second start port 52 In the case, the main control board 200 (step S8-3) to acquire the special figure 2 game information, and the main control board 200 (step S6- 1) and the main control board 200 (steps S11-7, S11-8, S11-11) that executes start determination based on the special figure 1 game information or the special figure 2 game information, and based on the general figure game information When the main control board 200 (steps S20-3, S20-4, S20-5) that executes the start determination and the start determination based on the special figure 1 game information is executed, the main that executes the first special symbol game When the control board 200 (step S11-14) and the start determination based on the special figure 2 game information are executed, the main control board 200 (step S11-14) for executing the second special symbol game, and the general figure game When the starting determination based on the information is executed, the main control board 200 (step S20-7) for executing the normal symbol game, and the starting determination based on the normal pattern game information When "per normal pattern" is determined , the main control board 200 (step S22-4) that generates a normal per game state in which the game ball can easily pass through the second start port 52, and when the jackpot game state ends, it is advantageous to the player. It is provided with a main control board 200 (step S43-2) that causes a time saving state. Further, while the time saving state is not occurring, the game is mainly progressed with the first special symbol game, and while the time saving state is occurring, the game is mainly progressed with the normal symbol game. And, as the end conditions of the time saving state, the time saving end condition 1 regarding the number of times of the first special symbol game, the time saving end condition 2 about the number of the second special symbol game, and the time saving end condition 3 about the number of normal symbol games are included.
That is, in the pachinko machine 1, as the end conditions of the time saving state, the time saving end condition 1 regarding the number of the first special symbol games, the time saving end condition 2 regarding the number of the second special symbol games, and the time saving end regarding the number of normal symbol games Condition 3 and are included.
Thereby, in the pachinko machine 1, the time saving state can be ended even when any one of the first special symbol game, the second special symbol game and the normal symbol game is executed. As a result, it becomes possible to achieve the intended ball-balling performance.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the time saving state is occurring than when "big hit"("big hit pattern 1") is determined by the start determination based on the special figure 1 game information executed while the time saving state is not occurring. It is more advantageous for the player when "big hit"("big hit pattern 1") is determined by the start determination based on the special figure 1 game information executed in the second. In addition, as the number of times of the first special symbol game related to the time saving end condition 1 (first time saving number of times), the number of the second special symbol game related to the time saving end condition 2 (second time saving number of times) and the time saving end condition 3 usually A small number of times is defined as compared with each of the number of symbol games (third number of times of time saving).
As a result, in the pachinko machine 1, during the occurrence of the time saving state, just before the number of normal symbol games reaches the third time saving number, the progress of the game mainly based on the normal symbol game is changed to the first special symbol game. Even when the game is switched to progress, the time saving state can be ended at an early timing. As a result, it becomes possible to achieve the intended ball-balling performance.

1 pachinko machine 41 starting gate 51 first starting port 52 second starting port 55 big prize winning port 200 main control board 300 effect control board

Claims (2)

first game information acquisition means for acquiring first game information when a game ball passes through the first area;
second game information acquisition means for acquiring second game information when the game ball passes through the second area;
third game information acquisition means for acquiring third game information when the game ball passes through the third area;
a first game determination means for executing a first game determination based on the first game information or the second game information;
a second game determination means for executing a second game determination based on the third game information;
a first game control means for executing a first game when the first game determination based on the first game information is executed;
a second game control means for executing a second game when the first game determination based on the second game information is executed;
a third game control means for executing a third game when the second game determination based on the third game information is executed;
Predetermined game state control means for generating a predetermined game state in which passage of the game ball through the second region is facilitated when a predetermined result is determined by the second game determination;
an advantageous state control means for generating an advantageous state advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
During the non-occurrence of the advantageous state, the game is mainly progressed with the first game, and during the occurrence of the advantageous state, the game is mainly progressed with the third game,
The conditions for ending the advantageous state include a first condition regarding the number of times of the first game, a second condition regarding the number of times of the second game, and a third condition regarding the number of times of the third game. Amusement machine. The first game information executed during the occurrence of the advantageous state is higher than the case where the specific result is determined by the first game determination based on the first game information executed during the non-occurrence of the advantageous state. When the specific result is determined by the first game determination based on, it is advantageous to the player,
As the number of times of the first game related to the first condition, a smaller number of times than the number of times of the second game related to the second condition and the number of times of the third game related to the third condition are stipulated. 2. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the game machine is

Images